yy Sal See ea ee EL Say ai ‘Pia. Dy.

‘ Part LV. of Volume 11. will be published on
| January 15, 1905.

The Fauna and Geography

of the
Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes

Being the Account of the Work carried on and
of the Collections made by an Expedition
during the years 1899 and rgo00

| Edited by

J. STANLEY GaRDINER, M.A.

Fellow of Gonville and Caius College and late Balfour Student
of the University of Cambridge.

VOLUME II. PART Ill.
With Plates XLIX—LXVI.

CAMBRIDGE:
at the University Press.
Lonpon: C, J. Ciay anp Sons,

Cambridge University Press Warehouse,

Ave Maria Lane.

Price Fifteen Shillings net.

\
\

a

ht boI00 toeo O

Te

1OHM/18l

SSAdq Mpisaaniuy aSpraguwy7 ayy fo saputs ayy
fo szuamugiuos ayg ysrsy

The Fauna and Geography
of the
Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes

VOLUME II. PART Il.

Zondon: C. J. CLAY anv SONS,
CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE,
AVE MARIA LANE,

AND
H. K. LEWIS,

136, GOWER STREET, W.C.

Glasgow: 50, WELLINGTON STREET.
Leipsig: F. A. BROCKHAUS.
rw Work; THE MACMILLAN COMPANY.
Bombay and Calcutta: MACMILLAN AND CO., Lrp.

[All Rights reserved.)

The Fauna and Geography

of the

x Wn

Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes

Being the Account of the Work carried on and
of the Collections made by an Expedition
during the years 1899 and 1900

Edited by

_ J. STanLEy Garpiner, M.A.

Fellow of Gonville and Caius College and late Balfour Student
of the University of Cambridge.

VOLUME II. PART Iil.
With Plates XLIX—LXVI.

CAMBRIDGE:

at the University Press.

1904

we
want J My), >
CAMBRIDGE: — ~—

an }
oid Sz M4 ] a
at acy % 4 :
: WG bo 5 PRINTED BY J. AND C. F. CLAY,
4G < "
i, 7 G AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS,
= 01; C000y rete - ; ; i i
PLEL I ; + : 7
Ma, « KY S =
Pe eI
AU 8 WANS
LTH A \\\\\\
e.

CONTENTS OF VOL it ean hile

Reports.

1. Marine Crustaceans. XII. Isopoda, with Description of a New
Genus. With Plates XLIX—LIII
By the Rev. T. R. R. Steppine, M.A., F.R.S.

2. Hydromedusae, with a Revision of the Williadae and Petasidae.
With Plates LIV—LVII .
By Epwarp T. Browns, B.A.

3. Marine Crustaceans. XIII. The MHippidea, Thalassinidea and
Scyllaridea. With Plate LVIII
By L. A. Borrapaiue, M.A.

4, Madreporaria. I. Introduction with Notes on Variation. II. As-
traeidae. With Plates LIX—LXIV

By J. Srantey GARDINER, M.A.

5. Antipatharia. With Plate LXV .
By C. Forsrer-Coorrr, M.A.

6. Arachnida. With Plate LXVI
By R. I. Pocock.

PAGE

699

722

750

755

791

797

MARINE CRUSTACEANS.

XII. ISOPODA, WITH DESCRIPTION OF A NEW GENUS.

By THe Rev. T. R. R. Srespine, M.A., F.R.S., Sec. LS.

(With Plates XLIX.—LIIL)

THIS small collection of Isopoda was entrusted to me for identification and description
by my friend Mr L. A. Borradaile, M.A., F.Z.S., of Selwyn College, Cambridge. Of the
fourteen species contained in it eight appear to be new, and for some of those which are
not new the collection has supplied information likely to be of service. Especially attention
may be called to the opinion expressed about Dana’s genus Corallana, that opinion, if correct,
involving the transfer of several species from Dana’s genus to a new one named Kacorallana.

FLABELLIFERA,

Flabellifera, 1882, Sars, Forh, Selsk. Christian, No. 18, p. 15; 1893, Stebbing, History of
Crustacea, p. 330; 1897, Sars, Crustacea of Norway, Vol. u. Pt. 3, p. 43; 1901, Harriet Richardson,
Proc. U.S. Mus. Vol. xxi. p. 505.

Sars observes that ‘the tribe includes six very distinct families, viz. Anthuridae,
Gnathiidae, Cymothoidae, Serolidae, Sphaeromidae, and Limnortidae; but of these the third
has generally been again subdivided into six families, viz. Aegidae, Cirolanidae, Corallanidae,
Alcironidae, Barybrotidae, and Cymothoidae, thereby increasing the number of families to no
less than eleven in all” That the existing classification requires to be slightly modified will
be argued in the following pages. The number of the families, however, will not be altered,
and species representing six of them will have to be considered.

Fam. Anthuridae.

In Willey’s Zoological Results, Part 5, pp. 618—620, 1900, I have rather fully discussed
the history of this family from its institution by Leach in 1814 to the end of the nineteenth
century, and am unwilling therefore to repeat what has been so recently published.

The resemblance that often exists between some at least of the limbs in species of
this family and those in the Cryptoniscus-stage of the Epicaridea is perhaps not unworthy
of remark.

A single specimen, about 6 mm. long, of a species apparently belonging to Anthura or
Cyathura, was ‘found on the back of a teat-fish at Minikoi” As the specimen had gone
dry, it seemed expedient to wait for further material before attempting to give this form
its place in classification,

G. I. 90

700 T. R. R. STEBBING.

Gen. Calathura, Norman and Stebbing.

Calathura, 1886, Norman and Stebbing, Z'rans. Zool. Soc. London, Vol. xu. Pt. 4, p. 122;
1893, Stebbing, History of Crustacea, p. 332; 1897, Sars, Crustacea of Norway, Vol. u. Pt. 3,
p- 44; 1901, H. Richardson, Proc. U.S. Mus. Vol. xxi. p. 509; 1901, Axel Ohlin, Bihang till
K. Svenska Vet.-Akad. Handlingar, Vol. xxvi. Pt. 4, p. 17.

The genus was instituted to receive Anthura brachiata, Stimpson, of which Paranthura
norvegica, Sars, and Paranthwra arctica, Heller, were considered to be synonyms. Sars in
1897 maintains the distinctness of his C. norvegica, which Ohlin in 1901 refuses to admit.
The C. afinis of Bonnier belongs, as I have earlier argued, rather to Paranthura or
Leptanthura. In 1901 Miss Richardson added a new species, CU. crenulata, from the Bahamas
and Yucatan. If we admit the presence of eyes in C. brachiata, as affirmed by Harger
and Heller and Sars, but denied by Ohlin, the species of the genus may be distinguished
as follows :—

1 Eyes wanting. 1. C. norvegica, Sars.
he present.—2.
Eyes feebly developed, with pigment white. 2. C. brachiata (Stimpson).
Hyes well developed, with pigment black.—3.
Head only half as long as first peraeon-segment. 3. C. crenulata, Richardson.
{Fen much longer than half the first peraeon-segment. 4. C. borradailei, n. sp.

It is not altogether improbable that the second species which Haswell referred to his
genus Haliophasma, namely H. maculatum, may when more fully described have to be
transferred from that genus to Calathura.

1. Calathura borradailei, n. sp. Pl. XLIX a.

Head with distinct rostral point, the lateral angles strongly produced. Segments of
peraeon stout, apparently not carinate at the sides, the first as usual closely attached to
the head, and the second distally narrowed, the seventh segment much the shortest.
Segments of the pleon all distinct. The long narrowly oval telson has the apex fringed with
setae nearly as long as itself, with scarcely perceptible crenulation. There is no appearance
in it of ‘statocysts’ such as those described in Anthura gracilis by A. Thienemann (Zool.
Anzeiger, Vol. xxvi. May 8, 1903).

The eyes are black, subtriangular, with the apex upward, situated near the antero-
lateral angles of the head, which are rounded, not acute as they appear in a dorsal view.

The first antennae have the first joint of the peduncle longer than the other two
combined, and a flagellum of twenty-one joints, the first seven stout, the rest filiform. The
second antennae have a long second joint between two shorter joints, the fourth much longer
than the third, and the fifth as long as the second. The flagellum, fringed with short setae,
is composed of twenty-two joints.

The horny-pointed mandibles have the third joint of the palps the longest and probably
armed with spines, though they were not actually seen. The second maxillae are evidently
present, very slender, armed with long setae, and joining with the lower lip and maxillipeds
to form a tube. In the maxillipeds it is difficult to determine whether that which Sars
claims as the very short first joint of the palp may not be the base of the large joint

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. 701

which he makes the second. Should that be so, the palp in Calathura will be not three-
jointed, but, in accordance with Harger’s view, two-jointed.

The first gnathopods are robust, but so provided with lobes and grooves that the various
joints may be compactly folded together. As usual the fourth joint is broad, and the fifth
very small, resting on the boss which projects at the base of the palm. The sixth joint
is massive, with the convex front margin longer than the hinder one, which differs from
what is found in the other species by forming a convex instead of a concave palm. This
is bordered with spinules and flanked with setae projecting from the surface on either side.
The finger is long and curved.

The second gnathopods were mutilated, wanting the last three joints, but they were
evidently in agreement with the first peraeopods, which have the fifth joint very small,
triangular, underriding the narrowly oblong oval sixth joint. The latter is fringed along the
hind margin with setae and six spines, which are followed near the junction with the finger
by a series of trifurcate spines. The finger has some little stiff hairs along the imner margin
and many setules on the convex outer margin. It ends in a spine and a small nail.

The remaining peraeopods are more slender, and have the fifth joint attached end to
end to the neighbouring joints, attaining its greatest length in the fourth pair. The second
and third pairs are the shortest. In all the finger is shorter than the sixth joint.

The pleopods have the inner branch narrowly oblong. The male appendage of the second
pair reaches beyond the branches and is slightly widened at the apex.

The uropods appear nearly to resemble those of C. crenulata, but to be fringed with
much longer setae. The upper ramus, however, though elongate, does not reach beyond the
basal joint of the lower one. The terminal joint of the latter is only a third as long as
the basal. There seems to be a short peduncle distinct from the rami. The specimen in
spirit had a few brown spots and stellate markings on a light ground.

Length of the specimen in strongly curved position 6 mm.; actual length about 10 mm.
Locality. A single specimen, male, taken at 23 fathoms depth, on hard ground, in
Fadifolu Atoll.

The specific name is chosen out of respect to Mr L. A. Borradaile, the zealous
carcinologist, through whom the present collection of isopods was entrusted to me.

Fam. Cirolanidae.

For the bibliography of this family reference may be made to Willey’s Zoological Results,
Part 5, p. 628, 1900, and South African Crustacea, Part 2, p. 49, 1902.

2. Cirolana sulcaticauda, n. sp. Pl. XLIX z.

This small species belongs to the group in which the angles of the fifth pleon segment
are enclosed by those of the fourth, and in which the hind limbs are not adorned with long
setae. By the longitudinal medio-dorsal furrow of the telsonic segment its close approximation
to (. sulcata, Hansen, is established. In other respects the pleon clearly separates the present
from the South African species.

The first segment of the peraeon is much the longest, the last three are somewhat trans-
versely rugose, with a line of tubercles adjacent to the hind margin. The first two segments

90—2

702 T. R. R. STEBBING.

of the pleon are short and smooth; the following three have each three conspicuous tubercles,
of which the middle one is the largest. In a lateral view the large median tubercle of the
fifth segment has the appearance of a great boss overhanging the telsonic segment. The
latter, though like C. sulcata furrowed down the centre between two tuberculate carinae, differs
by the greater parallelism of these keels which in the other species bend towards one another
at each extremity. Here the telson has eight spines at the apex instead of six; its con-
vergent sides are ridged, but not notched near the base. The setae are plumose.

The eyes are dark, of moderate size. The first antennae have the peduncle clearly
three-jointed, especially on the under side; m the short six-jointed flagellum the first joint is
considerably the longest. The second antennae have a peduncle as long as the first antennae,
its first three joints subequally short, the fifth a little longer than the fourth; the thirteen-
jointed flagellum rather longer than the peduncle.

The frontal lamina has its apex rounded, the sides converging slightly to the short wide
epistome. The upper lip has the lower margin slightly concave. The spines of the mandibular
palp are short, finely denticulate. The inner plate of the first maxillae carries three short
hirsute setae. The plates on the second jomt of the maxillipeds are held together by two
pairs of hooked spines; the fourth joint is short, the seventh narrow.

The first gnathopods have five stumpy spines on the hind border of the fourth joint;
the fifth scarcely asserts its existence except by a blunt projection of its hind margin; the
sixth has two blunt spines; the finger is tolerably stout with a well pronounced nail.

In the following limbs the fifth joint successively gains in prominence, till in the fifth
peraeopods it is subequal to the fourth or sixth. In the hind limbs the fourth and fifth
joints carry some long spines which are finely serrate.

In the second pleopods the male appendage is rather longer than the ramus to which
it is attached. The rami of the uropods are fringed with spines and plumose setae, the setae
at the apical notched angles being the longest. The inner ramus is very broad, reaching
beyond the outer one and the telson.

The specimen was 5 mm. long, with a breadth of about 2 mm.

Locality. The single specimen, a male, was taken at Hulule, along with some of Dana's
C. latistylis.

The specific name is chosen to call attention to the relationship between this and the
species with which it has been compared.

3. Cirolana latistylis, Dana.

Cirolana latistylis, 1853, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp., Vol. xi. p. 772, Pl. 51, fig. 6a—e; 1884,
Miers, Report Zool. H.M.S. Alert, pp. 303, 304; 1890, Hansen, Vid. Selsk. Skr., Ser. 6, Vol. v.
Part 3, p. 356; 1897, Whitelegge, Mem. Australian Museum, Vol. 1. Pt. 2, p. 149; 1900,
Borradaile, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 797.

‘Body smooth, naked, but slightly interrupted at base of abdomen. ~ Head transverse,
anteriorly rounded, not longer than next segment. Abdomen six-jointed; first segment nearly
concealed under the thorax; caudal segment subtriangular, a little oblong, broadly rounded
at extremity and crenulate, and ornate with spinules and shortish hairs. Caudal appendages
not reaching beyond line of abdomen, inner lamella broadly subovate, having crenulations, spinules,
and hairs like the caudal segment; the hairs not half as long as the lamella; outer lamella

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. 703

considerably the shorter and half narrower.’ This description given by Dana agrees excellently
with our specimens, except that in them the inner ramus of the uropods extends slightly
beyond the telsonic segment, and the outer ramus is as in Dana’s own figure a little over half
as broad as the inner. The hind margin of the head is concave. The second and third segments
of the peraeon are rather shorter than the rest. The eyes are large, black, wide apart, so
that their size is more apparent in a ventral than a dorsal view.

The upper antennae are separated only by the meeting apices of the head’s underfolding
triangular rostral point and the pentagonal frontal lamina. The first two joints of the peduncle
are only faintly separated, and the third joint is subequal in length to the two combined ;
the first joint of the nine-jointed flagellum is much shorter than the second, the whole
reaching a little beyond the peduncle of the second antennae. In these the first three joints
are short, the fifth slightly longer than the fourth, the elongate flagellum in the specimen
examined consisting of 21 joints.

The mouth-organs are characteristic of the genus.

The limbs are of the same general type as in the preceding species, the sixth joint in the
first gnathopod is considerably broader than in the two following pairs of legs. Dana observes
that ‘the fourth joint of the third pair is a little shorter than either the third or fifth pairs,
and longer than the tarsus.’ In our notation this should read that the fifth joint is a little
shorter than the fourth or sixth, and longer (but only a little longer) than the seventh.

In the telsonic segment there are four spines on each side of the bifid apical point.

Colour (in spirit) light, with brown speckling of very variable density.

Length 5mm. by a breadth of 2mm. or a little over. Dana gives the length as three
lines, which would be something more than 6 mm.

Locality. North Malé Atoll, 35 fathoms, hard sand; Hulule; Suvadiva Atoll, 44 fathoms,
hard muddy bottom; Kolumadulu Atoll, 38 fathoms, mud and weed.

Dana obtained the species from Straits of Balabac, north of Borneo, Whitelegge from
‘sponges in sandy pools’ at Funafuti Atoll, Borradaile also from Funafuti, ‘three examples
found on weed in the lagoon, one dredged in the lagoon in 15—25 fathoms of water.’

A specimen from Minikoi, noted as an ‘Isopod living in tentacles of large tubicolous worm
(Polychaeta 4),’ measured 5 mm. in length, by only 125 mm. in breadth. But after drawing
and dissecting it I could find no character but the narrowness to separate it from Dana's
species. It was a female, but not carrying eggs or young. The marsupial plates have the
hind margin cut into a fringe.

Fam. Corallanidae.

Corallanidae (part), 1890, Hansen, Vid. Selsk. Skr., Ser. 6, Vol. v. Pt. 3, p. 280; Alcironidae,
1890, Hansen, Vid. Selsk. Skr., Ser. 6, Vol. v. Pt. 3, pp. 285, 312, 390; 1893, Corallanidae (part),
Stebbing, History of Crustacea, p. 345; Alcironidae, 1893, Stebbing, History of Crustacea, p. 346 ;
Corallanidae (part), 1901, Richardson, Proce. U.S. Mus., Vol. xxm. p. 517; Alcironidae, 1901,
Richardson, Proc. U.S. Mus., Vol. xxut. p. 519.

In 1895 Dr H. J. Hansen reduced these two families to the rank of subfamilies. Whatever

the systematic dignity allowed them, they must, I think, be united. Were the Alcironidae inde-
pendent that group would more properly take its name from Tachaea of Schiddte and Meinert,

704 T. R. R. STEBBING.

that genus being older than Alcirona and Lanocira, both instituted by Hansen in 1890 to be
its companions. At the same date that author beautifully illustrated and described with his
accustomed clearness seven species from western waters, which he assigned to Dana’s genus
Corallana. Miss Harriet Richardson in 1901 added to this set an eighth species from Florida.
Hansen had further noted eleven species earlier than his own as with more or less probability
belonging to the same genus or at least to the same family. One of them, however, is Corallana
hirticauda, the single species on which Dana founded his genus. Although the description does
not satisfy all modern requirements it enables the species when obtained to be recognized,
and the conclusion cannot be escaped that its generic character is distinct from that of the
species assigned to Corallana by Hansen and Richardson. These, accordingly, I have referred
to a separate genus Hacorallana, distinguished by the great length of the apical tooth of
the mandibles, the bifid termination of the second maxillae, and the elongate antepenultimate
joint of the maxillipeds. The true Corallana agrees with Tachaea, Alcirona, and Lanocira,
in not having the point of the mandible very strongly produced, in having the apex of the
second maxillae simple, and in having the antepenultimate joint of the maxillipeds not longer
than broad. Hansen’s definition of the Alcironidae appears very well to suit the Corallanidae,
taken to include the above-named four genera, but excluding Hzcorallana, which will become
the representative of a family Hacorallanidae.

Gen. Corallana, Dana.

Corallana, 1853, Dana, U.S. Eupl. Exp. Vol. xut. pp. 748, 773; 1879, Schiodte and
Meinert, Naturhist. Tidsskrift, Ser. 3, Vol. xu. p. 286.

Schiddte and Meinert, in their treatise De Cirolanis Aegas simulantibus, group together
Barybrotes, Tachaea, new genera, with Dana’s Corallana. The first of these was placed by
Hansen in a separate family, Barybrotidae. To the third the joint authors assigned six species,
one of them being Heller’s Aega basalis from the Nicobar Islands, the remaining five (of which
four were new) having all been found at Ubay in the Philippines. Two of their species they
distinguished as Corallana hirticauda, Dana, and Corallana hirsuta, n. sp. Their figures and
descriptions leave no doubt in my mind that they have had before them the original species
for which the genus was instituted

For distinguishing this genus from the other members of the family it is convenient
to remember that Alcirona alone has the apex of the outer plate in the first maxillae armed
with two spines, that Zachaea alone has the joints of the maxillipeds reduced to six, apparently
by coalescence of the second and third, and that in Lanocira the second joint of the maxilli-
peds (leaving out of count the expansion in the female) is very little longer than broad, but
very much longer than broad in Corallana.

4. Corallana hirsuta, Schiddte and Meinert. Pl. Le.

Corallana hirsuta, 1879, Schiddte and Meinert, Naturhist. Tidsskr., Ser. 3, Vol. X11.
pp. 287, 297, Pl. 5, figs. 11, 12.

Dana, in describing Corallana hirticauda, from the coral reefs of Tongatabu, writes as
follows :— Body moderately narrow, posterior half of back to extremity of abdomen hirsute.
Head a little transverse. Eyes large. Antennae very unequal; second pair long, reaching to
fifth segment of thorax; flagellum about eighteen-jointed; first pair not much longer than

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. 705

base of second. Abdomen six-jointed, last segment triangular; sides straight; extremity rounded.
Caudal stylets not extending beyond abdomen, branches obtuse, outer much the narrower, not
longer than the inner. Feet short setulose.’

Neither in this nor in the much fuller account given by Schiddte and Meinert can
I find any character except one to justify the separation of their C. hirsuta from Dana's
C. hirticauda. Dana says that the outer branch of the uropod is ‘not longer than the inner,’
and figures it as somewhat shorter. Schiddte and Meinert say that the inner branch is
scarcely shorter than the outer, implying that the outer if anything has the advantage, which
in their figure they give it very decidedly. But on the other hand they say that in their
own ©. hirsuta the inner branch is much shorter than the outer. This again is borne out by
their figure and corresponds with what is observed in the specimens of the present collection.
All of them appear to have this particular feature, so that with reluctance I allow them to
stand under the name which separates them from Dana’s original species.

The body is depressed, so that here, as in other species of the genus, it shows the side-
plates even in a dorsal view. The very hirsute telsonic segment has bisinuate sides con-
verging to a rather broad slightly convex apex which carries eight spines.

The first antennae are prominent and contiguous at the base, with a broad, not very
long, composite basal joimt, only a little longer than the next or true third joint. The
flagellum has 11 joints, most of them carrying sensory filaments, the first jot much shorter
than the second. The second antennae have the first three joints very short, the fourth
subequal in length to the fifth, widest at its base, this character appearing in both sexes
and the young, but most developed in the male. The joints of the flagellum numbered
21 in one male specimen, but only 15 in another, 20 in a female, 14 in a little young
specimen,

The mandibles end in a short uncinate tooth accompanied by a small trifid plate; there
is a slight marginal prominence, perhaps representative of a vanished molar; the second joint
of the palp is the longest, both this and the third being in the distal part fringed with
setiform spines.

The first maxillae have a narrow inner plate, slightly expanded at its apex; the outer
plate ends in a strong unciform tooth.

The second maxillae are feeble, simple, with narrowly rounded apex.

The maxillipeds are narrow, only the second joint elongate, the fourth and fifth with

length and breadth subequal in the male but broader than long in the female, the sixth
and seventh joints small in both sexes.

The first gnathopods are short and stout, with four robust spines on the fourth joint,
between which and the sixth joint the fifth makes very little show. The spines on the sixth
joint are not robust. The finger is curved with a strong unguis.

The second gnathopods have the fifth jot very short but quite distinct, being otherwise
very similar to the first gnathopods.

The first peraeopods are very hke the second gnathopods. In the following pairs the
fifth joint attains greater importance, and the joints from the third to the sixth have longer
spines and a greater variety. In the last three pairs the fifth joint carries several spinose
spines on the apical border,

706 T. R. R. STEBBING.

The very broad inner ramus of the uropods in addition to numerous setae carries nine
spines on the broadly rounded distal margin. The longer but very much narrower outer ramus
has a fringing of long setae with spines at intervals, the apex subacute.

Colour, a pale ground sometimes strongly marbled with dark-brown stellate flecks, some-
times carrying only more or less distant spots of brown.

Length. A specimen here and there a little exceeded the length of 10 mm., but as a rule
specimens, even those loaded with young ones, did not reach fully 9 mm. Dana gives the
length of his species as nearly five lines, which may be reckoned as equivalent to 10 mm,
Schiédte and Meinert describe an ovigerous female of Dana’s species, which was 65 mm. long.
Of their own species the ovigerous female described was 85 mm. in length, and the ‘virgo’
9—9:5. As they had two specimens of the latter form, it may be inferred that they differed
slightly in size. In their ‘conspectus specierum’ these authors distinguish C. hirticauda as
having ‘Cauda media obscure bisulcata vel subaequata’ and ‘Ocul aequati vel subaequati’
from OC. hirsuta, with ‘Cauda media manifesto bisuleata’ and ‘Oculi manifesto granulati’ In
the present collection the bisulcation of the pleon is quite obscure, but whether the eyes are
less granular than in Schiddte and Meinert’s specimens I have no means of determining.

Locality. Minikoi, from rotten log in the lagoon, some of them marked as coming from
borings (possibly of Teredo) in the rotten wood. With them were some specimens of Limnoria,

Gen. Lanocira, Hansen.

Lanocira, 1890, Hansen, Vid. Selsk. Skr., Ser. 6, Vol. v. Pt. 3, pp. 287, 318, 391, 395;
1893, Stebbing, History of Crustacea, p. 346.

Hansen, having only a single species at command, notes that in this genus, as distinguished
from Alcirona, the hinder part of the body is naked, that is to say, not setigerous. But this
character is not applicable to the new species about to be described.

5. Lanocira gardineri, n. sp. Pl. LI a.

The head (at least in the adult male) has the front upturned into a little horn, and near
the hind margin, adjacent to the rather large dark eyes, there are a pair of tubercles. The
appearance is therefore something like that of Hwxcorallana tricornis (Hansen). The first segment
of the peraeon is considerably the longest, the seventh the shortest. The front side-plates are
rounded behind, the three hinder pairs somewhat quadrate and obliquely ridged. The first
segment of the pleon is medio-dorsally obsolete; the fifth has its angles a little produced but
flanked by those of the fourth segment. The telsonic segment has the sides very slightly sinuous,
fringed with setae, and converging to a rather broad truncate apex carrying plumose setae and
six spines. The dorsal surface of this segment is armed with twenty-six rather spine-like setae,
and there are a few on other parts of the back.

The first antennae have the first and second joints coalescent, lying under the projecting
front of the head, the third joint a little shorter than the composite one, the six-jointed flagellum
shorter than the peduncle, and the whole appendage not longer than the peduncle of the second
antennae. This is robust, with the first three joints together equalling the stout but not very
elongate fourth, the fifth shorter and much narrower than the fourth. The flagellum, slightly
longer than the peduncle, has numerous setae on the first seven of its thirteen joints.

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. 707

The frontal lamina is pentagonal. The mandibles, as usual in this family, are very firmly
attached to the lower lip, and have their free ends closely clipped in by the short upper lip.
The trunk of the mandible, besides having a curved margin, makes a rather strong bend of the
whole plate near the narrowed centre. The apex has no well-defined uncinate tooth as in
Corallana and Excorallana, but some ill-defined dentations, accompanied by a row of spine-teeth,
which on one of the mandibles point backward. The palp is attached near the base, and has
the middle joint the longest.

The outer plate of the first maxillae ends in a single, very long, strongly curved spine,
which is only seen in its natural shape when the trunk of the maxilla is set more or less
edgewise.

The second maxillae are nearly as in L. kréyeri, Hansen, the broad ‘lacinia of the second
joint’ being surmounted by an almost linear third joint which here carries a short seta in
addition to the long one described for L. kréyert.

The maxillipeds have the second joint a little longer than wide, the third, fourth, and
seventh joints small, and the fifth and sixth not very large.

The first gnathopods have the second and third joints channelled, the third carrying
a long spine on the front apex and a stout one on the hinder, the fourth joint is bordered
with five stout spines, the apical much the largest; the fifth joint is hidden between its
neighbours; the sixth is not strongly armed; the finger is large, and by help of its long nail
strongly curved. The second gnathopods scarcely differ from the first in structure, except
that the fifth joint is rather more conspicuous. The first peraeopods are like the second
gnathopods. The four following pairs are successively longer, otherwise agreeing closely together
in structure, the second joint broad, broadest in the fourth peraeopods, the fourth joint with
the hind apex broadly produced, the third to the sixth but especially the fifth furnished with
numerous spines on the apical border, the sixth joint short, a little longer than the strongly
curved finger.

In the second pleopods the male appendage has an acute apex, not nearly reaching the
end of the ramus.

The inner branch of the uropods reaches beyond the telsonic segment; it is fringed with
plumose setae and has nine spines on the broadly rounded distal margin. The much narrower
outer ramus does not reach beyond the telsonic segment; it carries eight spines among a
fringing of long setae.

The colour is light, speckled with scattered flecks of brown.

Length a little under 7 mm., by a breadth of nearly 3 mm. Another specimen, smooth-
headed, but apparently of the same species, was 45 mm. long by 2 mm. broad.

Locality. Mahlosmadulu Atoll, at 20 fathoms, on coarse sand and rubble.

The species is named out of respect to Mr Stanley Gardiner, by whom it was obtained.

6. Lanocira rotundicauda, n. sp. Pl. La.

There is so much resemblance between this and the preceding species that, when the
points of difference have been noticed, the question will still remain whether they may not
possibly depend on difference of sex and age in the specimens examined.

The form about to be described was a female carrying numerous young ones, with their
dark eyes showing conspicuously through the marsupium.

Gauls 91

708 T. R. R. STEBBING.

The head is smooth, the telsonic segment is broadly rounded, not at all apically truncate
dorsally sprinkled with setiform spines, which seem to be less stiff than those in the other
species and not arranged in the same order. Round the apical border the armature was for
the most part worn away, but in the young there are six spines with intervening setae
just as in L. gardineri.

The first antennae have a five-jointed flagellum, its first joimt much the longest, the last
two minute, as is the case in the young taken from the marsupium,

The second antennae are not specially robust; the flagellum is thirteen-jointed.

The mouth-organs do not give much assistance, because as shown in the figure the first
maxilla of the young one is normal, as was also the case with a larger juvenile specimen
not taken from the pouch of the mother, but this organ in the mother itself has a comparatively
short terminal hook and a short oval inner plate. This form of the first maxilla is probably
therefore a casual abnormality. The maxillipeds are very short, with the vibratory plate of
the second joint extending to the top of the sixth joint. In the maxillipeds of the juvenile
specimens there is nothing to show that the shortness of these appendages is abnormal, but
as they are without the vibratory plate of the female comparison is not easy.

The peraeopods are rather more slender than in L. gardineri.

Length 525 mm., by a breadth of 2 mm. There were also two small specimens, each
under 3 mm. long.

Locality. Mahlosmadulu Atoll, taken along with Lanocira gardineri at 20 fathoms.

L. kréyeri, Hansen, the type species of the genus, from Rio Janeiro, among other differences
has only four spines on the apical margin of the telsonic segment.

Gen. Alcirona, Hansen.

Alcirona, 1890, Hansen, Vid. Selsk. Skr., Ser. 6, Vol. v. Pt. 3, pp. 285, 313, 391; 1893,
Stebbing, History of Crustacea, p. 346.

This genus is well characterized by the very broadly crescentic epistome, the elongate
peduncle of the second antennae, and the two-spined apex of the first maxillae.

To the two species for which it was instituted by Hansen, a third is now added. The
three may be distinguished as follows:

Hinder part of body remarkably setose. 1. A. krebsii, Hansen.

Hinder part of body very moderately setose.—2.

First gnathopods with robustly pectinate finger. 2. A. insularis, Hansen.
“ (First gnathopods with the finger simple. 3. A. maldivensis, n. sp.

7. Alcirona maldwensis, n. sp. Pl. LIB.

The head is smooth, with a rather blunt rostral point. At the centre of the back the
fourth segment of the peraeon is nearly as long as the first, and the seventh not much shorter
than the fourth. The first two segments of the pleon are much concealed, the first, however,
though very short at the middle is not at that part obsolete as in the species of Lanocira
here described. The angles of the fourth segment are strongly produced, outflanking the
rounded slightly produced corners of the fifth segment. The telsonic segment has the sides

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. 709

slightly bisinuate, strongly convergent to an apex of very moderate breadth, with four spines
on what may be called the truncate part, but another on each side not quite in line with the
four, yet completing the series. The distal part of the whole margin is fringed with rather
short setae and about eighteen are sprinkled on the surface.

The eyes are large and dark. ‘The first antennae have the third joint at least as long
as the composite first and second. The ten- or eleven-jointed flagellum is rather longer than
the peduncle, and the whole appendage longer than the peduncle of the second pair. In
that the fourth joint is longer than the first three combined, the fifth considerably longer
than the fourth, the eighteen-jointed flagellum a good deal longer than the peduncle.

The frontal plate is pentagonal. The epistome stretches on either side much beyond
the short and narrow upper lip. The mandibles as mounted in situ with their cutting edges
under the lip appear to be much like those in Lanocira. The first maxillae have a slender,
blunt-headed inner plate, and two strong spine-teeth at the apex of the outer plate. The
second maxillae end in a smooth ovoid joint with the narrow end uppermost. The maxillipeds
are short and compact, a little more robust and with a larger seventh joimt than in the
female Lanocira rotundicauda,

The limbs of the peraeon differ little from the pattern of those in the preceding genus,
except that the hinder peraeopods are more slenderly built, with the apical spines of the
sixth joint more strongly spinose, and the sixth joint more elongate.

The inner branch of the uropods reaches considerably beyond the telsonic segment. It is
fringed with nine spines and numerous setae. The outer ramus is much shorter and much
narrower, with eight spines and many setae. Each ramus has a little notch, clearly apical
in the outer one, and occupying the outer angle of the inner one.

Colour, light with brown speckling.

Length, about 5 mm., by a breadth of about 2°5 mm.

Locality. Hulule, Maldive Islands. A single specimen, female with young.

Specifie name from the locality. Hansen’s A. krebsii was from the West Indies, his
A. insularis from Samoa.

Fam. Cymothoidae.

For the limitation and extension in which this family is accepted I may refer to the
discussion of the synonymy in South African Crustacea, Part 1, p. 55, 1900.

Gen. Cymothoa, Fabricius.

Cymothoa, 1793, Fabricius, Hntomologia systematica, Vol. U. p. 503; 1884, Schiddte and
Meinert, Naturhist. Tidsskr., Ser. 3, Vol. xiv. p. 223.

The synonymy of the genus could be produced to a considerable length, but would be
inappropriate here.
8. Cymothoa borbonica, Schiédte and Meinert, 1884.

Cymothoa borbonica, Schiédte and Meinert, Naturhist. Tidsskr., Ser. 3, Vol. X1v. pp. 226, 282,
Pl. X. figs. 7-10.

91—2

710 T. R. R. STEBBING.

As the present collection includes only two of the small males, this identification may
remain open to some question. The head has the incurved, broadly rounded front described
by the above-named authors, but the eyes which they speak of as ‘evanidi, are rather large
and though dull fairly conspicuous. The first antennae are well separated at the base, eight-
jointed, equal in length to the much more slender, nine-jointed second pair. The anterior
margin of the first peraeon segment is not so markedly trisinuate as figured in the Tdsskrift,
and the telsonic segment there spoken of as sulcate in the middle shows in our specimens
a slight transverse depression near the base but no longitudinal furrow. It is, as Schiddte and
Meinert say, a little wider than the fifth segment of the pleon, but this is in contradiction
to the character which they give of their sub-family Cymothoinae (op. cit. p. 222), in which
they say that the pleon has the fifth segment broader than the terminal one. Their statement
that the uropods are much shorter than the telsonic segment is quite opposed to their figure,
which shows them not at all shorter. In our specimens the difference in length is very small.
The rami of the uropods agree with the description by the joint authors, both being obtuse-ended,
the outer a little the longer, slightly curving inward, the inner a little the broader.

The male appendage of the second pleopods is stiliform, reaching a little beyond the very
broad rami.

Colour, pale, with dark dots minute and distant, little affecting the general appearance.

Length of one specimen 10 mm., breadth 3°75 mm., of the other 8 by 4mm. Schiédte and
Meinert give the length 115—14 mm. The breadth, ‘duplo longior quam latior, does not
correspond exactly with the figure, which is more than twice as long as the greatest breadth,
so that the relation of length to breadth may be taken as to some extent variable.

Locality, Hulule, from ‘Gills of large Parrot-fish.’

Fam. Sphaeromidae.

References to the literature of this family, with some remarks on the still rather obscure
boundaries of the included genera, are given in the Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 552, 1900; in
Willey’s Zoological Results, Part 5, p. 643, 1900; and in South African Crustacea, Part 2,
p- 64, 1902. From the Malay Peninsula Mr W. F. Lanchester has recently described a new
species under the name Sphaeroma feliz, in Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 3879, pl. 35, fig. 10,
1902. The character of the maxillipeds is not specified.

Gen. Eosphaeroma, Stebbing.

Exosphaeroma, 1900, Stebbing, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, p. 553; 1902, South African
Crustacea, Part 2, p. 64.

Sphaeroma serratum (Fabricius), for which the genus Sphaeroma was instituted by Bose,
has the maxillipeds differently constructed from those of almost all the later species, in
regard to which these appendages have been described, for, while in those species the fourth,
fifth and sixth joints are all produced into conspicuous lobes on the inner side, in the
original species there are no such lobes. The species now to be noticed has the fourth and
fifth joints very slightly lobed, but the sixth not at all. It therefore occupies an intermediate
position between Hxosphaeroma and Sphaeroma, yet so much nearer to the former than to
the latter that it cannot well be left in the genus to which Dana assigned it.

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. AL

9. Sphaeroma [Exosphaeroma ?] globicauda, Dana.
Spheroma globicauda, 1853, Dana, U.S. Expl. Exp. Vol. xu. p. 781, pl. 52, fig. 9 a, b.

Dana gives the following description:— Body nearly smooth, in part very fine granulous
and pubescent. Abdomen subtriangular, very tumid, excepting the parts towards the margin
around; at extremity a deep fissure, which at its mner end is produced a short distance
transversely in either direction. Caudal appendages reaching slightly beyond line of abdomen ;
inner lamella the broader and slightly the longer, broadly rounded at apex; outer having the
outer margin much reflexed.’ Then, after stating that the habitat was ‘Nassau Bay, Fuegia,’ he
adds :—‘ Length of body, two and a half lines. The fissure in the extremity of the abdomen
is of peculiar depth and shape; the part of the surface of the abdomen anterior to its Inner
extremity is a little raised, independently of the general globose elevation which characterizes
the whole segment anterior to this raised point. The minute hairs of the surface and slight
granulation are seen with a lens most distinctly on the caudal segment.’

Specimens from the lagoon at Minikoi agree so well with this account that nothing but
the difference of size, which in them scarcely exceeds 3 mm., could cause any doubt as to
the identity of the species. An examination, however, of what may confidently be regarded
as the sexes of one and the same species leads to the conclusion that the aperture in the
telsonic segment belongs only to the male. It is probably a character of the adult, since all
the smaller specimens as well as the female carrying young are devoid of this transversely
rounded opening. Cymodoce cordiforaminalis, Chilton, has the aperture of a rather different
shape, but is otherwise a species so similar to the present that it will be interesting to
learn whether it exhibits the same sexual difference.

The head has a blunt rostral point between two emarginations. In the male the seventh
segment of the peraeon is slightly indented at the middle of the hind margin, which is
smoothly convex in the female. The pleon has a very short first segment overlapped by the
peraeon. This segment is closely united to a composite segment, probably representing the
second to the fifth, the angles of the fourth and fifth being to a certain extent distinct but
strongly overlapped by those of the preceding segment.

The eyes are not very large, but prominent, conspicuously faceted. The first antennae
have a stout composite basal joint, followed by a third joint not much longer than broad, and
much shorter than the first joint of the eight-jointed flagellum, which exceeds the peduncle
in length and has sensory filaments on the terminal joints. What is here regarded as the
first joint of the flagellum corresponds with the third joint of the peduncle in Chilton’s de-
scription.

The second antennae are rather longer than the first, the second joint longer than the
first or third, the fourth than the second, the fifth than the fourth, but not ‘nearly twice
as long’ as in Chilton’s species. The flagellum is nine-jointed.

The mandibles have a strong molar and tridentate cutting edge with accessory plate and
spine-row, and three-jointed palp. The inner plate of the first maxillae is tipped with four
setae. But none of the mouth-organs appear to offer any very distinctive features except the
maxillipeds. These differ in a marked degree from those of Sphaeroma serratum, as also
from those of Sphaeroma rugicauda, Leach, but neither do they fully agree with those that
have been described in any of the species of Exosphaeroma or Cymodoce. The fourth joint is
considerably longer than the fifth, and each of these is distally expanded on the imner side,

(fy T. R. R. STEBBING.

but without forming an elongate lobe; the sixth is fully as long as the fifth, but much
narrower; it 1s broader and longer than the seventh, but forms no distal lobe. The armature
is feeble, except on the apex of the plate of the second joint.

The anterior limbs of the peraeon are rather robust, the first pair distinguished from
the rest by the fifth joint underriding the sixth, its triangular form allowing the fourth and
sixth joints to meet on their outer margin. In the more elongated limbs of the last three
pairs the fifth joint has its share in the lengthening. In all the limbs the finger has a
little hooked spine in advance of the small hooked unguis. The male appendages of the
last peraeon-segment are elongate, close together at the base, with their stiliform apices a
little divergent.

The male appendage of the second pleopod appears to be of unusual breadth at the
base, then tapering to a narrow apex at some distance beyond the plate that carries it. In
Sphaeroma rugicauda this appendage is very long and has a somewhat widened rounded apex.

In the uropods the movable outer ramus is serrate almost all along the outer margin
as well as on the rounded apex, in the ramus coalesced with the peduncle the serration
reaches up the outer margin barely halfway. Length 3 mm., by a breadth of 15 mm.

Locality. Lagoon, Minikoi, along with a specimen of Ligia.

Heller in the Crustacea of the Novara Expedition, pl. 12, figures three species each with a
foramen in the telsonic segment, which he names respectively Sphaeroma perforata, Milne-Edwards,
S. stimpsoni, n. sp., and S. scabricula, n. sp. None of them can be confused with the present
species. The first is easily distinguished by the long median tooth of the last peraeon-
segment. But it claims attention here as having the same sexual difference in the telsonic
segment as our species exhibits. Heller is certainly wrong in attributing the circular
aperture to the female and the simply notched telson to the male. He also says that the
postero-median tooth of the peraeon is shorter in the male than in the female, as to which
the reverse may be taken for granted. But his text is plainly contradicted by the explana-
tion of the plate above cited.

Gen. Cymodoce, Leach.

Cymodoce, 1814, Leach, Edinb. Encycl., Vol. vi. p. 4383; 1902, Stebbing, South African
Crustacea, Part 2, p. 73.

The difficulties connected with the definition of this and various other genera of the
Sphaeromidae are discussed by Mr Beddard in his Challenger Isopoda, Reports, Vol. 17, p. 1465.
Until a monograph of the family is carried out by some patient and skilful hand these
difficulties are likely to remain. The incapacity of the animal to become completely globular,
the resistance to complete folding of one plate over the other in the uropods, and the presence
of a lobe in the excavated apex of the telson, are superficial characters which do not offer
very firm ground for generic distinction. The maxillipeds do not differ from those found in
Exosphaeroma gigas, and in most of the species which I have assigned to that genus.

10. Cymodoce bicarinata, n. sp. Pl. LIL s.

The head broad, the first segment of the peraeon the longest, the sides of the body
very hirsute, and the hind margins of the segments hairy, the sixth and seventh also
tuberculose. In the pleon a small first segment is covered by the peraeon, the composite

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. 76133

segment which follows has on the hind margin two sub-median bosses. These are followed
on the telsonic segment by two slightly divergent carinae leading to two very large bosses
each carrying a crest of hairs. To them succeeds a large median boss. This is followed by
a convex-sided apically truncate process emerging beyond the convergent apices of the telsonic
emargination. All these parts are strongly fringed with setae, and distinguish the species
from C. pilosa, Milne-Edwards, which has an otherwise similar pleon, but ending in an almost
cylindrical median plate, rounded at the end and not reaching beyond the two lateral apices. In
C. aculeata, Haswell, the median plate projects beyond the lateral points, but it is differently
shaped, and the bosses on the pleon are arranged transversely, not in successive pairs. In
C. tuberculata, Haswell, the bosses are successive, but of quite different character, and the
apices of the terminal notch project beyond the median process.

The eyes are wide apart, the anterior margin of the first peraeon-segment being deeply
emarginate to receive them.

The first antennae have a large, bent, composite basal joint, with the following joint not
very large. To the stoutly constructed peduncle succeeds a slender flagellum of 14 joints, of
which the first is much the longest. In the second antennae the peduncle is not robust,
the fifth joint a little longer than the fourth, the flagellum 17-jointed. In the mandibles
the principal cutting edge is horny-looking, not dentate. The palp is rather slight. The
maxillipeds have the fourth, fifth and sixth joints fully lobed. As will be seen in the figure
the palp on one side of the specimen was in process of regeneration. The limbs of the
peraeon are of the character usual in this family. The male appendages of the seventh
peraeon-segment are rather long, not very acute. In the second pleopods the male appendage
is very long, with its narrow inward-curving apical part reaching much beyond the plate
to which it is attached.

The uropods are straight, rather narrow, very setose, the outer ramus more obliquely truncate
than the inner, which it outreaches, both extending beyond the telsonic segment, the outer
having a prominent spine at the apex of its raised outer border. In C. longistylis, Miers, the
inner ramus has an outward curve, and decidedly outreaches the outer.

Length, 6 mm., breadth, 3 mm,
Locality. Maimikoi, from 5 to 7 fathoms in centre of lagoon,

Specific name referring to the carimae on the pleon.

Fam. Limnoriidae.

Limnoriadae, 1850, White (part), List of British Animals in Brit. Mus., Crustacea, p. 68
(without definition); Limnorzidae, 1880, Harger, Rep. U.S. Fisheries, Part 6, p. 371; 1893,
Stebbing, History of Crustacea, p. 367; 1897, Sars, Crustacea of Norway, Vol. u. Part 4, p. 74

The family, as restricted by Harger, still contains a single genus.

Gen. Limnoria, Leach.

Limnoria, 1814, Leach, Edin. Encycl., Vol. vu. p. 433; 1867, Bate and Westwood, Brit.
Sessile-eyed Crustacea, Vol. 11. Part 18, p. 349; 1880, Harger, Rep. U.S. Fisheries, Part 6,
p. 373; 1897, Sars, Crustacea of Norway, Vol. u. Part 4, p. 76.

714 T. R. R. STEBBING.

The full definition drawn up by Professor Sars was probably based on the species
L. lignorum alone. To include the other species undoubtedly belonging to the genus it
requires some slight modification. Thus the epipod of the maxillipeds is not always lanceolate,
and the outer ramus of the uropods is not always unguiform. Authors generally (myself
included) have agreed in speaking of the trunk limbs as similar in structure, but, while no
doubt they have some features in common, especially in regard to the terminal couple of
joints, they are at the same time uncommonly well provided with distinguishing points.
Between the first gnathopod and the fifth peraeopod the contrast is sufficiently striking.

The four species now known, all of them small, pale, setose, and very much alike in
general appearance, may be distinguished as follows :—
Maxillipeds with epipod shorter than the second joint,
outer ramus of uropods unguiform. 1. L. lignorum (J. Rathke), 1799.

Maxillipeds with epipod longer than the second joint,
outer ramus of uropods not unguiform,—2.

9 {Both rami of uropods very small. 2. L. antarctica, Pfeffer, 1887.
“ (Only the outer ramus of uropods very small.—3.

( Epipod of maxillipeds narrow, mandibular

] palp diminutive. 3. L. segnis, Chilton, 1883.
2 | Epipod of maxillipeds broad, mandibular

| palp well developed. 4. L. pfefferi, n. sp.

In the well-known species of the Atlantic coast Harger notices that in the mandibles
‘below there is a slight tubercle, apparently the rudiment of the molar process, His con-
jecture is supported by the rather stronger development of this tubercle in LZ. segnis.
Between the acutely lanceolate epipod of the ZL. lignorwm, and the forms with rounded apex
in LZ. segnis and L. pfefferi, the narrow leaf shape in L. antarctica offers an intermediate
term. In his elaborate description of the last-named species Dr Pfeffer broaches an extra-
ordinary theory that ‘the pleopods in general have not the value of a limb but of an epipod,
so that accordingly the branchial plates of the Isopoda lke those of the Decapoda are
epipods, and therefore in a certain sense equivalent formations.’ That this view has met with
no acceptance was to be expected.

11. Limnoria pfefferi, n. sp. Pl. LIL a.

The general appearance in close agreement with L. lignorwm, like which it has the head
almost globular, much narrower than the rest of the body, the first segment of the peraeon
much the longest with a conspicuous dorsal V-shaped grooving, the side-plates of the second
and third segments quadrangular oval, the four followig pairs more or less acute, the upper
surface of the body beset with hairs of varying length. In the pleon the angles of the
first segment are a little less prominent than those of the four following segments; the fifth
at the middle is as long as the first four together, and about half as long as the almost
circular, flatly saucer-shaped telsonic segment, with the proximal part of which it shares in
forming a smoothly rounded median elevation.

The eyes are wide apart, very small.

The first antennae have the second joint subequal to the third, not shorter as in
L. segnis and L. lignorum, and the second joint of the flagellum is not so abruptly narrower

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. 715

than the first, as in the latter species. The long olfactory setae are present. The second
antennae closely resemble those of L. lignorum. The epistome, lips, mandibles, and both
pairs of maxillae agree with those of the last-mentioned species. The maxillipeds also are
nearly the same in structure, but with a differently shaped epipod. This is little more than
twice as long as broad, broadly rounded at both ends, reaching well beyond the long narrow
second joint of the maxilliped, the ovoid form impaired only by the lower part of the inner
margin being slightly concave. This appendage in JL. segnis is about four times as long as
broad, and is apically acute in the other two species.

The first gnathopods are as usual distinguished from the other limbs by the fifth joint
underriding the sixth, and having no free hind margin. Along front and hind margins of
the third and along the hind margin of the three following joints small blunt spines are
discernible. At the hinder end of the sixth joint there is a prominent spine with a convex
comb as in L. lignorum, and the finger just above its long curved nail has the well-known
bifid spine. The other limbs agree closely in shape and armature with those of the last
named species, the first and second peraeopods being the smallest, but distinguished by their
position as confronting one another. The fifth peraeopods are the longest, with the second
joint much narrower than in the preceding pairs; the fourth joint is produced far over the
hind margin of the fifth, the length of its slender spine-fringed process being particularly
conspicuous in the new species; the fringe of pectinate spines round the fifth joint is found
in all the species. The spine above the finger-nail is bifid only in the first gnathopods.
The pleopods except in the last pair have the inner plate narrowly oblong. The male stylet
of the second pair I have not observed. Probably, as in the other three species, and as in
the genus Hurydice, it is affixed near the middle of the inner margin.

The uropods have the inner ramus shorter than the stout peduncle, twice the length of
the small straight outer branch, all the constituents being setose. The peduncle is much
larger in comparison with the inner ramus than in JL. segnis.

Length of unrolled specimen 3°5 mm., breadth 1:25 mm,

Locality. Rotten wood in lagoon, Minikoi.

EPICARIDEA.

Epicarida, 1882, Sars, Forh. Selsk. Christian., No. 18, p. 18; Epicaridea, 1893, Stebbing,
History of Crustacea, p. 392; Bopyridae, 1895, Hansen, Isopoden...der Plankton-Exp., p. 18;
Epicarida, 1898, Sars, Crustacea of Norway, Vol. u. Pt. 11, p. 193; Epicarides, 1900, Bonnier,
Contr. @ Vétude des Epicarides les Bopyridae, p. 90.

Of the seven families recognized by Giard and Bonnier, Sars rejects the Microniscidae, ‘as.
only representing transitory larval stages of different Epicarida, and combines the Cyproniscidae,
Cabiropsidae, and Cryptoniscidae under the last of those names. Bonnier a little later upholds
the Microniscidae, and distinguishes in all twelve families.

Fam. Bopyridae.

As this is not the place to explain the various extensions and restrictions which authors
have assigned to this family name, it will be sufficient to refer to the bibliographical index in
M. Jules Bonnier’s admirable monograph, Contribution a@ étude des Epicarides les Bopyridae,

G. IL. 92

716 T. R. R. STEBBING.

published in the year 1900, and to the discussion of this group by Professor Sars in 1898.
The latter author, while highly commending the services rendered to our knowledge of the
Epicaridea by MM. Giard and Bonnier in 1887 and subsequent years, raises a protest against
the assumption that the mere statement of the host is sufficient to identify the parasite. He
points out that ‘one and the same species of Crustacea not seldom is found to be infested
by several species of parasites.’ So far as at present known the Bopyridae are parasitic only
on decapod Malacostraca. It is a little confusing that M. Bonnier should make the Bopyridae
one of the families of a section Bopyrinae, when Dr Hansen has already made the Bopyrinae
one of the subfamilies of the Bopyridae.

Tylokepon, n. g.

Among the various genera closely allied to Kepon, Duvernoy, 1840, Leidya, established
by Cornalia and Panceri in 1861, is the only one founded on the male sex, and this is unique
in the possession of elongate uropods. Among those dependent on characters of the female,
Gigantione, Kossmann, 1881, alone has in that sex biramous uropods. Lrgyne, Risso, 1816,
the Portunicepon of Giard and Bonnier, agrees with Aepon and is distinguished from the
rest by having the branches of the pleopods more nearly equal. Cancricepon, Giard and
Bonnier, 1887, has a medio-dorsal boss on each of the last four peraeon-segments. Trapezt-
cepon, Bonnier, 1900, has none of these. Grapsicepon, Giard and Bonnier, 1887, has a medio-
dorsal boss on each of the last two peraeon-segments, and herein it agrees with the new
genus, which differs from it in that, instead of a simple boss on the sixth peraeon-segment,
the boss there is strongly trifid. The head also furnishes a striking character for the new
genus, being formed as it were of two short stout cylinders with rounded ends, of which the
inner ones look as if they were flattened below where they meet, forming nearly a right angle.

The name of the genus is formed in allusion to its aftinity with Kepon, and to the fact
that the parasitic species for which it is instituted was found in the branchial region of
Tylocarcinus styx (Herbst) as identified by Mr L. A. Borradaile, through whom I received
the specimens.

Though the generic characters above given may not be thought of very high value, they
fall well into line with those of the kindred genera already established, and under existing
circumstances a new generic name seemed rather a matter of necessity than of choice.

12. Tylokepon bonnieri, n. sp. Pl. LIII.

9. The appearance of the prominent white head has been already described. The
peraeon from its opaque orange colour did not show clearly either the division of the segments
or the contour of the lateral bosses, but the triple boss in the middle of the sixth segment
was white and stood out clearly. The single median boss on the seventh segment was also
white and directed somewhat upwards. When mounted this proved to have its rounded end
marked off by a slight constriction. The laminae of the first pleon-segment are very large,
strongly tuberculate on the upper surface and edges. The following pairs are successively
smaller.

The first antennae are very small, three-jointed; the second a little larger, five-joimted.

The ‘buccal rostrum’ and the pair of maxillipeds, each member of which is consolidated
into a single piece of great breadth at the centre with a narrow incurving apex to represent
the terminal joints, differ very slightly from the corresponding parts in Cancricepon (see

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. 717

Bonnier, op. cit. Pl. VII. figs. 3, 4). The strong muscles are conspicuous in their large but
shallow cavity. Below the maxillipeds is that which Bonnier designates as the lower cephalic
lamina. This in Cancricepon eleyans, Giard and Bonnier, forms three lobes on either side
in such a way that the outermost are produced furthest backward and the innermost the
least far. In the present species the central piece, though pretty strongly emarginate, is
scarcely bilobed, and by extending back much beyond the two lateral pairs of lobes appears
to differ from the corresponding part in all the neighbouring genera.

The vast marsupial plates attached to the minute first gnathopods have as usual the
anterior section underlying much of the maxillipeds, this part being produced on the inner
(upper) surface into a broad sculptured lappet overlying a piece of the plate’s hinder section.
On the outer (ventral) surface the two sections pass smoothly into union, the upper one
having a convex groove near the proximal part of the leg. The first gnathopods differ from
the rest of the limbs chiefly in having the fifth joint smaller and more completely over-
lapped by the compact sixth joint. The second and third joints increase in size in the
successive pairs of limbs to the fourth peraeopods. In both the fourth and fifth peraeopods
the second joint is rather remarkable for the bulging of the two margins, and the third
joint is greatly widened distally.

The pleopods have the outer branch similar to the pleural laminae of the segment, but
smaller, and the inner branch very much smaller than the outer, with the margins a little
irregular, at least in the earlier pairs, and perhaps in all.

The uropods are single-branched, long and slender, very much crumpled in the spirit
specimen,

Length 3 mm., with a breadth of about 2°5 mm.

Locality. The specimen had been already extracted from the host, Tylocarcinus stya,
which was taken at ‘Hulule, Malé Atoll, Maldives” and which showed on the left branchial
region of the carapace the cavity that had been occupied by the parasite.

The specific name is chosen in compliment to M. Jules Bonnier, whose finely executed
and instructive work on this group of the Isopoda has been more than once referred to above.

In the same bottle with the specimen just described there were four other isopods,
which I am disposed to regard as belonging to the same species, although, as Sars rightly
argues, Idem propterea non est, quia captus ibidem.

g- This minute creature bears a very near resemblance to the males of Cancricepon
elegans and Grapsicepon edwardsi, as figured by M. Bonnier. It would be an extraordinary
chance that the female parasite of Tylocarcinus should have reached England from the
Maldives, without a male of its own species, but accompanied by a male belonging to some
other species of the same family.

The present specimen is probably not mature, since it has second antennae reminiscent
of the cryptoniscus-stage. The pleopods also are more strongly developed than in the adult
of Cancricepon elegans, but in correspondence with the bopyrian stage of that species. No
dorsal or ventral bosses were perceptible.

The eyes are dark, longer than wide. The limbs all nearly alike, with the fourth and
fifth joints very small, the sixth compact. The terminal segment of the pleon is _bilobed,
the lobes a little prolonged, each with a minute seta at the apex and another at the side.

Length estimated at half a millimetre.
92—2

718 T. R. R. STEBBING.

The cryptoniscus-stage, whether of this or some other species, was represented by three
specimens, smooth, narrow, sharply tapering to the uropods, the head broader than long, with
a pair of gleaming eyes. In describing Liriopsis pygmaea (Rathke) Sars says, ‘eyes very
distinct, each consisting of a dark pigment, within which is imbedded a single rather large,
refractive lenticular body. The dorsal view which he gives of that species is in fair agree-
ment with the specimens now under notice, but in these the ocular pigment is not dark,
and the fourth and fifth peraeopods have not the peculiar shape characteristic of Liriopsis.

The first and second gnathopods are compact, subchelate, with the fifth jomt apparently
in coalescence with the sixth. The peraeopods are slender, all having the fourth and fifth
joints very small, the fifth triangular, underriding the sixth. The second joint is widest at
the middle and narrow at both ends; the third, which is rather shorter but broader, is
narrow only at the base; the sixth lke the second and third has a convex outer and more
or less straight inner margin; near the apex of the latter it carries a fine spine and in the
first three pairs two minute spinules on the widened apical margin, but a single spine on
the comparatively narrow apex of the last two pairs. The finger is thin, slightly curved,
longer on the fourth and fifth peraeopods than on the three preceding pairs, but in none
longer than the sixth joint.

The pleopods have a broad but short peduncle armed at the inner angle with two long
spines. The rami are short, not longer than the peduncle, each carrying four long plumose
setae, the outer which is the less robust having in addition a short plumose seta at the
outer angle.

The uropods have short peduncles, quite as broad as they are long. The outer ramus,
scarcely longer than the peduncle, carries a long seta and two that are shorter. The inner
ramus, more than twice the length of the outer, tapers to the apex, which nearly agrees
with that of the outer ramus in armature.

Length 1°5 mm., with a breadth of about 0°4 mm.

ONISCIDEA.
Fam. Ligiidae.
Gen. Ligia, Fabricius.

For references to the bibliography of tribe, family, and genus, the reader may be invited
to consult Willey’s Zoological Results, Part 5, p. 645, 1900.

13. Ligia exotica, Roux’.

Ligia exotica, 1828, Roux, Crust. de la Meédit. et de son littoral, Livr. ut. Pl. XIII. fig. 9;
1885, Budde-Lund, Jsopoda terrestria, p. 266.

Budde-Lund, from whom the reference to Roux is taken, gives a full synonymy. The
single specimen in the present collection was a female without the uropods, the flagellum
of the second antennae having about thirty-eight joints, the telsonic segment agreeing well
with Dana’s figure of that part in the species which he names ‘Lyg. gaudichaudi?, adopting
the specific name from Milne-Edwards. Budde-Lund puts both the French author’s and Dana’s
names in the synonymy of L. exotica.

Locality. Lagoon, Minikoi. Taken along with Sphaeroma [Hxosphaeroma ?] globicauda.

1 See ‘“‘Land Crustaceans,” by L. A. Borradaile, Fauna Geogr. Maldives, ete., vol. 1. p. 98.

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. 719

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

PLATE XLIX a. Calathura borradailei, n. sp. (p. 700).

n.s. Natural size, that is, length when fully extended, of specimen represented in the adjoining
figure, lateral view, curved position.

C. Cephalon with first peraeon segment in dorsal view.
Pl. Pleon with last peraeon segment in dorsal view.
a.s., @.%. Upper and lower antennae.

m., mx. 1, map. Mandible, first maxilla, maxillipeds.

gn. 1, prp.1, prp.5. First gnathopod, first peraeopod, fifth peraeopod, with higher magnification of
some spines of prp.1, and of finger tip of prp. 5.

plp.1, plp.2. First and second pleopods, with higher magnification of distal part of male appendix.

T., urp. Telson and uropods, ventral view. This figure and all the figures of separate appendages
are magnified to the same scale, except those of the mouth-organs, which are on the same
scale as the enlarged details of prp. 1,5, and plp. 2.

PLATE XLIX B. Cirolana sulcaticauda, n. sp. (p. 701).

n.s. Lines indicating natural size of specimen figured below in dorsal and lateral views.

a@.8., a.%., m.m. First and second antennae, and mandibles, above which are the upper lip, epistome,
and frontal lamina.

ma. 1, ma. 2, map. First and second maxillae, and the maxillipeds.

gn. 1, prp.5. First gnathopod and fifth peraeopod.

plp. 2. Second pleopod.

Pl. Pleon in dorsal view, less highly magnified than the rest of the details, which are on
a uniform scale.

PLATE La. Lanocira rotundicauda, n. sp. (p. 707).

n.s. Natural size of female specimen figured below in dorsal view.

a.s. @.%. First and second antennae.

m., ma. 1, ma.2, map. Mandible, first and second maxillae, and maxilliped.

gn.1, prp.5. First gnathopod and fifth peraeopod.

Pl. Pleon less highly magnified than the foregoing details, and these than the following.
max. 1, jue. First maxilla of young extracted from the maternal pouch.

Pl. juv. Pleon of the same juvenile specimen.

PLATE Les. Corallana hirsuta, Schiddte and Meinert (p. 704).

n.s. Lines indicating natural size of female specimen figured below in dorsal view.

a.s. d. First antenna of male, with part of head showing facets of eye.

720 T. R. R. STEBBING.

a.i. 6. Second antenna of male, flagellum incomplete,

map. 3. Maxilliped of male.

prp.5. 3. Fifth peraeopod of male.

m. Mandible of female; this and following details not from the specimen figured in full.
1.4. Lower lip of female, in lateral view.

mx. 1, ma. 2, map. First and second maxillae, and maxillipeds of female.

gn. 1. First gnathopod of female.

Pil. Pleon of female, less highly magnified than the other details.

PLATE LI a. Lanocira gardineri, n. sp. (p. 706).

n.s. Natural size of male specimen figured below in dorsal and dorso-lateral view.
a.s., @.%. First and second antennae.

m.m. Mandibles, with cutting edge of one more highly magnified.

mx. 1, mx.2, map. First and second maxillae and maxillipeds.

gn. 1, prp.5. First gnathopod and fifth peraeopod.

plp.2. Second pleopod.

Pl. Pleon, less highly magnified than the foregoing details.

PLATE Lis. Alcirona maldivensis, n. sp. (p. 708).

n.s. Natural size of female specimen figured below in dorsal view.

a. 8., @.%., m.m. First and second antennae and mandibles surmounted by upper lip, epistome, and
frontal lamina.

mx. 1, ma. 2, map. First and second maxillae and maxillipeds.
gn.1, prp.5. First gnathopod and fifth peraeopod.
Pi. Pleon in dorsal view, less highly magnified than the foregoing or following details.

@.8., a.%., Juv. First and second antennae, with part of head showing the eyes, in a specimen
extracted from the maternal pouch.

Pl. juv. Pleon of the same juvenile specimen.

PLATE Lila. Limnoria pfefferi, n. sp. (p. 714).

n.s. Natural size of specimen figured below in dorsal view.

a.s., ai. First and second antennae.

i.s., 1.7 Upper lip with epistome, and lower lip.

m.m., mx.1, max.2, map. Mandibles, first and second maxillae, maxilliped.

gn.1, gn.2, prp.d. First and second gnathopods and fifth peraeopod, with parts more enlarged.

urp., Pl. Uropod in two aspects, pleon in dorsal view.

Fauna and Geography Maldives and Laccadives.

sot

es

athe

B42

T.R.R.Stebbing del.

CALATHURA BORRADAILEI,n sp.

Plate XLIX.

E Wilson, Cambridge.

CIROLANA SULCATICAUDA,n sp.

Fauna and Geography Maldives and Laccadives. Plate L.

E Wilson , Cambridge

TR.R.Stebbing, del

LANOCIRA ROTUNDICAUDA ,nsp. CORALLANA HIRSUTA, Sch. & Mein.

i
iy nl Aue
i
a >
yi
=
co 4
’ i
Pes 1 ud
‘
o
5
i
i
i
i
,
i = ,
= j
7 i
a -
i
7
+
‘
‘ ‘ i
‘

7 . ‘ set nae = 7

-

Ly r

Faunse and Geography Maldives and Laccadives. Plate LI,

Pd
ie J x
)

f

TR.R.Stebbing , del. E.Wilson , Cambridge.

LANOCIRA GARDINERI,n.sp. ALCIRONA MALDIVENSIS,n sp.

Plate LII,

L
Utiig SONY
‘\ \

urp. | Pl.

T.R.R.Stebbing del. E Wilson, Cambridge.

LIMNORIA PFEFFER], n.sp. CYMODOCE BICARINATA ,n sp.

Fauna and Geography Maldives and Laccadives Plate LIT.

GC.

T R.R.Stebbing, del E. Wilson, Cambridge.

A. GRYPTONISCUS. STAGE: C.6: B.?: TYLOKEPON BONNIERI n-g. et sp.

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. 721

PLATE LII B. Cymodoce bicarinata, n. sp. (p. 712).

n.s. Natural size of male specimen figured below in dorsal and lateral views.
a.s., a.%. First and second antennae.

l.s., 1.2. Upper lip with epistome, and lower lip.

m.m., mx.1, ma.2, map. Mandibles, first and second maxillae, and maxillipeds.
gn. 1, prp.5, plp.2. First gnathopod, fifth peraeopod, second pleopod.

o.m. Male appendages of seventh peraeon segment and second pleopod, these and the mouth-organs
being much more highly magnified than the antennae, limbs, and pleon.

Pl. Pleon in dorsal view.

PLATE LIII a4, 8, c. Tylokepon bonnieri.
A. (p. 718).
n.s. Natural size of Cryptoniscus-stage in dorsal view to the right.
oc. ye in lateral part of the head, as seen when flattened out.
@.8., @.%., or.p. First and second antennae, and oral parts.

gn. 1, prp.5, plp., urp. First gnathopod, fifth peraeopod, a pleopod, uropods and end of pleon.

IBa(ps flit):

n.s. Natural size of supposed male in curved position figured above laterally.

C. Head with antenna of one side.

gn.1, gn. 1. First gnathopods in attachment to the segment.

Pi. Pleon in ventral view.

C. (p. 716).

n.s. Natural size of female specimen figured to the right in dorsal and ventral views.
@.s., @.%., os. First and second antennae and mouth in situ.

map., gr. 1. Maxilliped and first gnathopod in their relative position, first gnathopod separately more
highly magnified.

prp.4, prp.5. Fourth and fifth peraeopods on the same scale as the separated gn. 1.

Pl. Pleon in dorsal view.

HYDROMEDUSAE,
WITH A REVISION OF THE WILLIADAE AND PETASIDAE.

By Epwarp T. Browns, B.A., Zoological Research Laboratory,
University College, London.

(With Plates LIV.—LVIL)

CONTENTS.
PAGE
ANTHOMEDUSAE.
Revision of the family Willadae . : : : > : : c 6 724
Proboscidactyla tropica, species nova (Pacific Genet eiaeleyy ie : : 2 5 ¢ 727
Proboscidactyla varians, species nova : : ‘ : : : c : : , 728
LEPrtOMEDUSAE.
Phialidium tenwe, species nova : : : . c : . : . : - 730
Pseudoclytia gardineri, species nova : . 0 . : : : : P : 731
Aequorea maldivensis, species nova . : : c : . , : é 2 . 732
Mesonema pensile (Modeer) . : : ¢ : é : : . : c 5 733
TRACHOMEDUSAE.
Revision of the family Petasidae . c : : : c c : : : : 735
Olindias singularis, species nova. 2 3 : . : . : : : 737
Liriope tetraphylla (Chamisso et Hysenberds) F : : 0 ; : ¢ . : 738
Aglaura hemistoma Péron et Lesueur . : c . 5 : : ; c 739
Amphogona apsteini (Vanhoften), genus novum . . : : : . - . 739
NARCOMEDUSAE.
Solmundella bitentaculata (Quoy et Gaimard) . : > : 0 F : 6 : 741
SIPHONOPHORA.
CALYCOPHORAE.
Diphyes chamissonis Huxley . . : A A : : : : 5 : F 742
Diphyopsis campanulifera (Eschscholtz) . : c c : : Sf = Os : ; 743
Abyla trigona Quoy et Gaimard 5 : : é : 5 : : , ‘ 743
PHYSOPHORAE.
Agalmopsis sp. ‘ 5 ; : : : : F : ; : ‘ i 744
Physalia utr ee Eschscholtz : : ‘ : : ‘ : . é , : 744

Velella sp. : : : . : 5 : é : : : ; F : : 744

HYDROMEDUSAE. 423

INTRODUCTION.

ALTHOUGH the collection does not contain many specimens, a few more would have been
a distinct advantage, and the species are not numerous; it has, nevertheless, brought to light
some interesting medusae. It is a welcome addition to our knowledge of the Hydromedusae
of the Indian Ocean, and I express my sincere thanks to Mr Stanley Gardiner for allowing
me the privilege of examining the specimens.

The Anthomedusae and the Leptomedusae of the Indian Ocean are not well known and
a very few species have been recorded. There are five species in this collection and four
of them are new to science. The medusae belonging to these two Orders are usually found
in littoral waters and seldom far away from land. They are liberated, with few exceptions,
from fixed hydroids, and consequently their geographical distribution is limited to the region
occupied by their hydroids. A genus often has a wide geographical range, but seldom its
species, which are usually confined to definite areas, or even to certain localities, so that some
of the new species belonging to the Anthomedusae and the Leptomedusae are probably
limited to the Maldive Islands.

The Trachomedusae, the Narcomedusae and the Siphonophora have no fixed stage in their
life-history and they are the inhabitants of the oceans, drifting hither and thither with the
currents. Their species have usually a very wide geographical range and some extend over
the Atlantic, Indian, and Pacific Oceans. Although Mr Gardiner made extensive use of the
tow-net, yet a very few specimens of the Oceanic medusae were taken, and considering the
geographical position of the Islands one would have expected to have seen a more extensive
collection.

SUMMARY.

In the revision of the Williadae I have used for the generic character the number of
radial canals which leave the stomach, and for the specific character the branching of the
canal system. There are now two genera, namely, Proboscidactyla and Willia. The genera
Dyscannota and Willetta of Haeckel are no longer needed. In three species of the Williadae
I have found that the circular canal is absent and that its place is occupied by a solid
chord of endoderm cells. The radial canals are in direct communication with the basal bulbs
of the tentacles.

Mesonema pensile, one of the Aequoridae, has the lower wall of the stomach quite rudi-
mentary, so that the mouth must always remain very wide open. I have failed to see how
this stomach can act as a digestive organ and have suggested that the canal system has
taken on the function of a stomach. This may also apply to other Aequoridae and account
for the large number of radial canals and the excretory pores on the circular canal. The
Maldive specimens are exactly like a figure of a medusa given by Forskal (1771), afterwards
called Mesonema pensile. I cannot find any evidence that this medusa has been taken since
Forskil’s time. The Aequoridae require a thorough revision, but this can only be properly
done with the aid of a sufficient number of specimens as most of the species now have imperfect
descriptions. Special attention should be paid to the shape of the basal bulbs of the tentacles.
So far I have found the shape to be different im every species which I have examined.

Ch 10h 93

724 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

As the shape is constant for each species in all stages of development, it is easy to identify
the early and intermediate stages, which are lable to be described as distinct species and
perhaps placed in different genera.

The revision of the genera belonging to the Petasidae has not involved any alterations in
generic names. The structure of the sense organs has been taken for the character of the
two subfamilies, Petnachnidae and Olindiadae, instead of the absence or presence of centripetal
canals, which was used as the subfamily character by Haeckel. The genera Aglawropsis and
Gossea have been placed among the Olindiadae, and so have the following additional genera,
Gonionemus, Gonionemoides, and Vallentinia. The structure of the tentacles has been used as
the principal character of the genera belonging to the Olindiadae.

A new genus, Amphogona, has been instituted for Pantachogon apsteini of Vanhotfen. This
medusa is bisexual, having male and female reproductive organs on alternating radial canals.
I believe this to be the first recorded case of hermaphroditism amongst the Craspedote
medusae. The new genus has been placed with the Aglauridae, but it also possesses characters
of the Trachynemidae and looks like a connecting link between the two families.

Order ANTHOMEDUSAE.
Family Williadae, Forbes, 1848.

Character of the family. Anthomedusae with 4, 6 or more radial canals, each having
one or more lateral branches (except in the earliest stage) running to the margin of the
umbrella. Stomach with 4, 6 or more lobes, upon which the gonads are situated. Mouth
with four or more lips, or with a folded margin. Tentacles simple, evenly distributed (not
arranged in groups) round the margin of the umbrella.

The Williadae were classified by L. Agassiz (1862) as a family belonging to the Tubulariae
(Gymnoblastea-Anthomedusae), but Haeckel (1879) removed the family to the Leptomedusae.
He considered the gonads to be upon the radial canals and not upon the stomach. In 1893
I succeeded in connecting Willia stellata, Forbes, with the Gymnoblastic hydroid Lar sabel-
larum, Gosse, and cut a series of sections which showed that the gonads were upon the stomach
and its lobes.

Haeckel placed the Williadae as a subfamily of the Cannotidae, and used the mode of
branching of the canal system as the basis for classification. He introduced two new genera,
namely, Dyscannota and Willetta, on the supposition that A. Agassiz had wrongly identified
his specimens. It appears to me that the number of main radial canals is of greater im-
portance than the mode of branching of the canal system and should be used for the generic
character. The mode of branching, which carries with it the number of tentacles, would be
of more yalue as a specific character.

The development of the radial canal system shows that the earliest free-swimming stage
has unbranched canals. A young Proboscidactyla has four radial canals, without branches, and
four tentacles. A young Willia has six unbranched radial canals and six tentacles. The
branching of the canals appears later and passes through a definite series of stages.

A single abnormal specimen in the Maldive Collection, belonging to the Williadae, led
me to investigate the literature relating to all the species and I have now attempted to
make a revision of the family.

HYDROMEDUSAE. 725

The Absence of a Circular Canal. Brandt (1838) in his description of Proboscidactyla
flavicirrata states that a circular canal was not observed, but a very definite inner marginal
edge was visible. When I was examining specimens of Willia mutabilis I noticed that what
then was regarded by me as the circular canal was very slender and inconspicuous compared
with the radial canals. As I could not make out a definite canal with the microscope a
series of sections was cut. The sections showed a solid chord of cells without any opening in
the centre. Sections were also cut of Willia stellata and these failed to show a circular canal.
I have also examined Willia stellata alive when an active circulation was going on in the
radial canals and inside the basal bulbs of the tentacles, but I did not see a circulation round
the margin of the umbrella. Externally the solid chord of cells looks like a circular canal
and expecting one to be present it is easy to mistake it for a canal. As every tentacle is
in direct communication with the radial canals, the circular canal became functionless and it
has now ceased to exist.

The Clusters of Nematocysts on the Ex-umbrella. In several species the nemato-
cysts on the ex-umbrella have been carefully described, and it has been shown that their
arrangement is a definite one. Radial clusters of nematocysts, situated midway between every
two tentacles, extend from near the margin of the umbrella to about halfway or nearly to
the top of the umbrella. The clusters are connected with one another by a kind of canal
(just under the surface of the ex-umbrella), along which the nematocysts travel. An investigation
of the nematocysts in Willia stellata when alive showed that isolated nematocysts travelled
along the margin of the umbrella, then entered a canal, and after proceeding a short distance
stopped. A cluster is formed by the accumulation of nematocysts. I could not find a cluster
of nematocysts on the very margin of the umbrella, but always isolated nematocysts; the first
cluster being at a little distance from the margin. In the earliest free-swimming stage there
is only a single cluster between every two tentacles and as the umbrella increases in size
other clusters are formed. The number of nematocysts in a cluster, the shape of the cluster,
and the number of clusters in each row, I found to be very variable in the adult of Willia
stellata.

Genus Proboscidactyla, Brandt, 1835.

Generic Character. Williadae with four radial canals leaving the stomach.

Proboscidactyla flavicirrata Brandt, 1835.

Proboscidactyla flavicirrata, Brandt (1835); Brandt (1838, p. 390, Taf. x1x.): Lesson (1843) ;
L. Agassiz (1862); A. Agassiz (1865, p. 173, figs. 230—282); Haeckel (1879); Proboscidactyla
brevicirrata, Haeckel (1879, p. 160); Murbach and Shearer (1902), (1903, p. 178).

The description of this species by Brandt and in addition the figures drawn from life by
Mertens show that the main radial canals have two principal branches (a wide bifurcation),
which run to the margin of the umbrella. From the inner side of each of the principal
branches a number of branchlets run to the margin and the branchlets again branch near
the margin. Mertens’ figures show that a main canal has 18 branches which are in connection
with 18 tentacles. The medusa should have altogether about 72 tentacles, a number far in
excess of those of any other described species of the family.

93—2

726 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

A. Agassiz figures the same type of radial canal system for specimens taken on the
American side of the Pacific Ocean. He records the presence of clusters of nematocysts on
the ex-umbrella. Haeckel, however, considered that Agassiz’s specimens were specifically distinct
from those described by Brandt and gave to them a new specific name—P. brevicirrata. Murbach
and Shearer have given a description, without figures, which practically confirms Agassiz’s
observations.

The specimens which have been described by the above authors had all reached the
adult stage, but not quite the same stage in growth. Murbach records 54 tentacles for the
largest specimen, Agassiz gives 64 tentacles, and Mertens’ figures show about 70 tentacles.
The early and intermediate stages of this species have not yet been recorded.

Distribution. North Pacific: Kamchatka (Mertens, vide Brandt). British Columbia:
Gulf of Georgia (A. Agassiz). British Columbia: Victoria Harbour (Shearer).

Proboscidactyla occidentalis (Fewkes), 1889.

Willia occidentalis, Fewkes (1889, p. 109, Pl. V, fig. 3).

The four main radial canals run straight to the margin of the umbrella, and each canal
gives off two opposite lateral branches, which again branch. Each main canal has therefore
five terminations leading direct into five tentacles. A single cluster of nematocysts lies on the
ex-umbrella between every two tentacles. Fewkes states that the “ovaries are four in number,
arranged at the base of a four-parted stomach.” The medusa has twenty tentacles, with bright
reddish basal bulbs.

Distribution. North Pacific: California; Santa Cruz Is. (Fewkes).

Proboscidactyla ornata (McCrady), 1858.

Willsia ornata, McCrady (1858, p. 149, Pl. [X.); L. Agassiz (1862); A. Agassiz (1865, p. ale
figs. 274a—279). Dyscannota dysdipleura, Haeckel (1879). Willett ornata, Haeckel (1879).
Willia ornata, Fewkes (1882, p. 299, figs. 22—23).

In the earliest free-swimming stage the medusa has four main radial canals, without any
branches, and four tentacles (Fewkes, 1882). Agassiz (1865) has figured the intermediate stages
showing that each main radial canal gives off a branch which runs to the margin of the umbrella,
Later on a second branch appears on the side opposite to the first branch, and this also goes
to the margin. McCrady (1858) described the adult stage with four main radial canals, each
with three terminal branches and sixteen tentacles. Owing to the growth of the umbrella
during the development of the canal system the main canals become curved and in the adult
the appearance of the system is correctly expressed by saying that each main canal is twice
dichotomously branched. The development of the canal system in this species is similar to
that of Willia stellata, and can be conveniently separated into four stages.

First stage. Four radial canals without branches. 4 tentacles.
Second stage. Each main canal with one branch. 8 tentacles.
Third stage. Each main canal with two opposite branches. 12 tentacles.

Fourth stage. Each main canal with three branches. 16 tentacles.

HYDROMEDUSAE. 727

Haeckel’s classification of the family Cannotidae is primarily based upon the branching
of the radial canal system, and secondarily upon the number of main radial canals from the
stomach and the position of the gonads. The genera of this family have become somewhat
complicated, as both Anthomedusae and Leptomedusae have been mingled together. Haeckel
placed Willia ornata, McCrady (non Agassiz) in a new genus— Willetta, belonging to the
sub-family Williadae. Willia ornata, A. Agassiz (non McCrady) is given a new generic and
a new specific name, Dyscannota dysdipleura, and placed in the sub-family Berenicidae. Haeckel
did not recognise the fact that Agassiz was describing the early and intermediate stages, showing
the development of the canal system.

Distribution. North Atlantic: United States; South Carolina (McCrady). Massachusetts
(A. Agassiz). Rhode Island (Fewkes), (Brooks).

Proboscidactyla gemmifera (Fewkes), 1882.

Wiha ornata, Brooks (non McCrady), (1880); Brooks (1882). Willia gemmifera, Fewkes
(1882, p. 300, Pl. L.). Dyscunnota gemmifera, Mayer (1900, p. 47, Pl. VIIT.).

When Brooks first found this species with medusa-buds he considered it to be a stage
in the life-history of Willia ornata, McCrady. Fewkes succeeded in finding the first stage of
Willia ornata, McCrady, and reared it up to the adult without seeing medusa-buds, and, as
Agassiz had also described the early and intermediate stages without medusa-buds, Fewkes
considered Brooks’s medusa-budding Willia to be a distinct species and proposed for it a
new specific name. Mayer fortunately found some specimens and has described them with
excellent figures. He has adopted Haeckel’s system of classification, hence the generic name
Dyscannota. Mayer's figure shows that the medusa-bud, still attached to its parent, but ready
for liberation, has four radial canals, without branches, and four tentacles. The parent medusa
has two branches to each main canal, and twelve tentacles. Brooks’s specimen belonged to an
earlier stage, having only one branch to each canal, and eight tentacles.

The medusa-buds are upon stolons which hang down inside the cavity of the umbrella.
The stolons are situated on the radial canals at their juncture with the stomach, one stolon
on each of the four canals, and have at their free ends medusa-buds.

Distribution. North Atlantic: United States; North Carolina (Brooks), Tropical
Atlantic: off Florida; in the Gulf Stream (Mayer).

Proboscidactyla tropica, species nova.

Willsia sp. Huxley (1877, p. 120, fig. 17).

This medusa has, up to the present, escaped having a specific name, and although figured
and partly described in the well-known textbook, “A Manual of the Anatomy of Invertebrate
Animals,” it was omitted by Haeckel in his Monograph. Huxley’s description is as follows:

“In August 1849, while in the North Pacific, off the Louisiade Archipelago, I took a
species of Wellsia, im which stolons were developed at the bifurcations of each of the four
principal radiating canals of the nectocalyx. Each stolon was terminated by a knobbed extremity
containing many nematocysts and gave rise, on one side, to a series of buds, of which those
nearest the free end of the stolon had acquired the form of a complete medusoid. They

728 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

had four unbranched radiating canals and four tentacles; but it is probable that they would
assume the form of the parent stock after development.”

With the aid of the figures I have been able to draw up a description of the species and
by bestowing upon it a specific name may prevent it from becoming lost again.

Description. Umbrella hemispherical, with a slight apical projection, Stomach short.
Four main radial canals, each with three branches, all going to the margin of the umbrella,
A stolon bearing medusa-buds hangs from each main canal at its junction with its first branch,
and has at the free end a cluster of nematocysts. Sixteen short marginal tentacles, in direct
communication with the radial canals. Size and colour not recorded.

Distribution. Tropical Pacific: Australasia; Louisiade Islands (Huxley).

Proboscidactyla varians, species nova (Pl. LIY. figs. 1, 2).

The collection contains only a single specimen, and though in a good state of preservation,
yet it is badly contracted and has lost its natural shape. It is regarded by me as an abnormal
specimen,

Description. Umbrella a little broader than high. Stomach with six lobes. Six radial
canals, each with one to three lateral branches. Circular canal absent. Medusa-buds upon
the radial canals, close to the stomach. Sixteen or more tentacles, with large triangular basal
bulbs. Clusters of nematocysts on the ex-umbrella, arranged in radial rows.

Colour. Basal bulbs of the tentacles dark brown (in formalin).
Size. Umbrella 3 mm. in width and 2 mm. in length.
Distribution. Indian Ocean; Maldive Islands, Miladumadulu (Gardiner).

If this solitary specimen had possessed no medusa-buds I should have placed it in the
genus Willia, on account of its possessing six main radial canals. The medusa-buds show
only four basal bulbs, with tentacles just beginning to develop, and there is not the slightest
trace of any more bulbs. The fully developed medusa-buds of Proboscidactyla tropica and
gemmifera have four main radial canals and four tentacles. The earliest free-swimming stage
of Proboscidactyla ornata has also four main radial canals and four tentacles. But the earliest
stage of Willia stellata has six main canals and six tentacles. The medusa-buds of this
specimen indicate that it belongs to the genus Proboscidactyla and not to the genus Wallia.

The parent medusa has six main radial canals: with a variable number of lateral branches,
and the lobes of the stomach show a want of symmetry. Willia stellata frequently shows
a variation in the number of radial canals and in the number of lateral branches. As a
rule when the number of main canals is above the normal number, then the branching of
the canals is irregular. It will be seen in the figure that the abnormality of this specimen
occurs in one quadrant, where three adjacent canals leave the stomach, each having only one
lateral branch. These occupy the place of a main canal with four terminations on the margin
of the umbrella. In a normal specimen at this stage, I consider that there should be a
stomach with four lobes, four main radial canals, each twice dichotomously branched, sixteen
tentacles. The specimen has only two medusa-buds, each of which is situated on a main radial
canal, adjacent to the stomach. There is no stolon with a series of medusa-buds as found in
P. tropica and P. gemmifera. The basal bulbs of the tentacles (fig. 2) are large and extend

HYDROMEDUSAE. = FY)

into the substance of the umbrella, and the brown pigment of the bulbs is extended along
some of the canals. Inside the margin of the umbrella there is a circular band of endoderm
cells, but no circular canal can be seen. The groups of nematocysts extend over the ex-
umbrella from near the margin to the top of the umbrella and are arranged in radial rows,
one row between every two tentacles. In each row there are about six to seven circular
clusters of nematocysts. Near the margin of the umbrella the canal along which the nema-
tocysts travel is present, but it is only visible for a short distance.

Psythia prolifera, Agassiz and Mayer (1902, p. 143, Pl. I.). The authors, in placing the
new genus in the family Williadae make the following statement: “In all previously known
genera of the family Williadae the radial canals are branched. The general form, colour, shape
of proboscis, and method of budding of the present medusa, however, all incline one to place
it among the Williadae. It may be a primitive, or ancestral, form in which the canals
have remained simple, or possibly an atavistic sport from some of the more complex Williadae,
or an immature individual which may give rise to medusa-buds before attaining its complete
development.” A single specimen was found at the Tortugas, in the Gulf Stream off Florida.
The medusa has four radial canals without branches; four tentacles with basal bulbs without
any pigment; four perradial stolons bearing medusa-buds on the side of the stomach. There
are no clusters of nematocysts on the ex-umbrella, but the medusa-bud has a few scattered
nematocysts on the ex-umbrella, and they are absent in the parent medusa. It is like the
first stage of Proboscidactyla gemmifera in possessing four radial canals, four tentacles, and
stolons bearing medusa-buds. But the stolons are upon the stomach and not upon the radial
canals, as in the other medusa-budding Williadae. The peculiar clusters of nematocysts are
absent and also the pigment in the basal bulbs of the tentacles. The presence of medusa-
buds and the absence of gonads indicate that the medusa is an early stage, but there is
no conclusive evidence that it belongs to the Williadae.

Genus Willia, Forbes, 1846.

Generic Character. Williadae with six radial canals leaving the stomach.

Willia stellata Forbes, 1846.
Medusoid form.

Willsia stellata, Forbes (1846), (1848, p. 19, Pl. I.); Gosse (1853, p. 359, Pl. XX.);
Willia stellata, L. Agassiz (1862); Haeckel (1879); Willsia cornubica, Peach (1867, p. 357, Pl. L);
Lar sabellarum, Browne (1896, p. 468, Pl. XVI); (1898, p. 818, figs. 1—9).

Hydroid form.
Lar sabellarwm, Gosse (1857, p. 113, Pl. XX.); Hincks (1872, p. 315, Pl. XTX.); Allman (1872).
Distribution. North Atlantic; British Isles.

Willia mutabilis Browne, 1902.

Willia mutabilis, Browne (1902, p. 280).
Distribution. South Atlantic; Falkland Islands (Vallentin).

730 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

Willia furcata, Haeckel (1879, p, 158). There is no figure published of this species, but
the description shows that, if it is not identical with Willia stellata, it comes very close to its

Distribution. North Atlantic; France (Haeckel).

Order LEPTOMEDUSAE.
Family Bucopidae, Gegenbaur, 1856.
Genus Phialidium, Leuckart, 1856.

Generic Character. Eucopidae with many marginal sensory vesicles; one or more between
every two tentacles, each having a single otolith. Many tentacles. No marginal cirri. A gonad
on each of the four radial canals. Stomach not on a peduncle.

Phialidium tenue, species nova, (PI. LIV. fig. 4, Pl. LVII. fig. 16.)

Description. Umbrella watch-glass-shaped and thin. Stomach small, quadrangular in
shape, and situated on a semi-globular thickening of the umbrella. Mouth with four lips
and a sinuous margin. Four gonads extending over the outer half of each radial canal.
Tentacles 25 in number. One or two minute marginal bulbs between every two tentacles.
Sense organs numerous, one or two (rarely three) between every two tentacles, with a single
otolith.

Size. Diameter of the umbrella 15 mm.

Distribution. Indian Ocean; Maldive Islands, Miladumadulu (Gardiner).

There is only one specimen in the collection. The semi-globular thickening of the umbrella
upon which the stomach is situated cannot be regarded as a true peduncle; it is simply
a thickening of the wall of the umbrella. The tentacles are thin and slender with transverse
rows of nematocysts. Their basal bulbs are a little broader than long; one measured
0-45 mm. in width, 0°33 mm. in length. The specimen closely resembles Phialidiwm tempo-
rarium, Browne, one of the commonest medusae in the British seas. It differs in the shape
and size of the basal bulbs of the tentacles, being broader and about twice the size. The
umbrella is a little thicker and the semi-globular mass of jelly at the top of the sub-umbrella
cavity is very much larger. In Phialidium temporarium this thickening is often absent and
never very conspicuous.

Genus Pseudoclytia, Mayer, 1900.

Generic Character. Eucopidae with many marginal sensory vesicles; one or more
between every two tentacles, each having a single otolith, No marginal cirri. Five radial
canals, each with a single gonad. Stomach not on a peduncle.

Mayer established the genus Pseudoclytia for a new species (P. pentata), which he found
in great abundance at the Tortugas, off Florida, U.S.A. This species is pentamerous, possessing
five radial canals, five gonads, and a mouth with five lips. Among 1000 individuals Mayer
found 70°3 p.c. to be pentamerous with radial canals at equal distances apart. Hitherto among
the Eucopidae four radial canals were always regarded as the normal number and any

HYDROMEDUSAE. 731

numerical change was the sign of a variation from the normal type. The British Eucopidae
very rarely show a numerical variation in the radial canals. There can be but little doubt
that this pentamerous species has arisen from a Phialidiwm-like medusa, which had four radial
canals, four gonads, and a mouth with four lips.

In the Maldive collection there are two specimens belonging to the Eucopidae, with five
radial canals. If Mayer had not instituted the genus Pseudoclytia, the species would have
been placed in the genus Phialidium and regarded as a variation from the normal type.
I think, on the whole, it will be best to place this new species in the genus Pseudoclytia.
The two specimens are practically identical, and the chances of catching two abnormal
Phialidiwm exactly alike are very remote so far as my experience goes.

Pseudoclytia gardineri, species nova. (Pl. LY. figs. 1—3.)

Description of the Species. Umbrella broader than high (? watch-glass-shaped). Stomach
short with a pentagonal base. Mouth with five small lps. Five radial canals (four nearly at
right angles and one in between). Gonads very small (globular in the female and oval in
the male), one situated on each radial canal about midway between the stomach and the
margin. About 13—14 tentacles, with globular basal bulbs. Usually one or two marginal
bulbs between every two tentacles, except in one segment where there is a conspicuous group
of six bulbs (three on each side of a tentacle). Sense organs numerous, usually two or three
between every two tentacles, with probably one otolith.

Size. Diameter of the umbrella about 5 mm.
Distribution. Indian Ocean; Maldive Islands, Miladumadulu (Gardiner).

Neither of the specimens is in very good condition, so that the exact shape of the
umbrella is doubtful, but it seems fairly thin and without a thick mass of jelly over the
cavity of the umbrella. The mouth of one specimen is closed, and it has five distinct lips;
in the other specimen it is expanded and has a quadrangular aperture with a sinuous margin.
The ovaries are very small, globular in shape and containing about four to six ova. The
gonads of the male are a little nearer the margin of the umbrella than those of the female.
The characteristic feature of this species and that upon which the specific character is based
is the group of six large marginal bulbs adjacent to one of the tentacles. This group is
very conspicuous on the margin of the umbrella and is at once seen. The tentacle is in
the centre of the group (fig. 3), and has three bulbs on each side. A marginal sense organ
hes between each of the outer two bulbs, but there is not one next the tentacle. On the
inner side of the circular canal a series of bays exists, corresponding in position to the bulbs
and tentacles. In the male specimen (fig. 1) there are indications of two more groups of
bulbs being formed, each with two bulbs on either side of a tentacle.

It is a pleasure to me to associate this new species with the name of Mr J. Stanley
Gardiner.
Family Aequoridae, Eschscholtz, 1829.

Genus Aequorea, Péron et Lesueur, 1809.

Generic Character. Aequoridae with numerous simple unbranched radial canals. Stomach
circular, with the lower wall fully developed. Mouth capable of closing up.

G. Il. 94

732 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

The type species of the genus Aequorea was described and figured by Forskal (1775),
under the name of Medusa aequorea. Péron placed it in the genus Aequorea under the name
of Aequorea forskdlea, where it has since remained. There will always be some doubt about
the identity of the type species, as the figure and description omit just the details which
are essential. I think it will be best to follow Forbes (1851) and consider the medusa, which
he described and figured as Aequorea forskalea, to be identical with the type species.

The shape of the basal bulbs of the tentacles is a valuable guide for the determination
of the species. I have found it to be quite different in six species of the Aequoridae.
As the shape is constant in each species it facilitates the identification of the early and
intermediate stages.

Aequorea maldivensis, species nova. (Pl. LVI. figs. 4—12.)

Description of the Species. Umbrella saucer-shaped, about four to six times as broad
as high, moderately thick. Stomach circular, its diameter about half the diameter of the
umbrella, its lower wall large enough to allow the mouth to close up. Mouth with numerous
short lips, closely packed together. Radial canals numerous (50—70). Gonads occupying
nearly the whole length of every radial canal, and hanging down from the sub-umbrella,
bilamellar. Tentacles less numerous (30—50) than the radial canals, having a large hollow
basal bulb, which curls over a thickening of the ex-umbrella. Marginal bulbs about one to
four between every two tentacles. Sense organs very numerous, about 15—20 between every
two tentacles (or 2—4 between every two bulbs).

Size. Umbrella 75 mm. in width and 35 mm. in height (largest specimen).
Distribution. Indian Ocean; Maldive Islands, Haddumati (Gardiner).
The collection contains three specimens:

A. Umbrella about 35 mm. in diameter and about six times as broad as high. Stomach
about 20 mm. in diameter. Radial canals, 52. Tentacles, 21. Marginal bulbs, usually one
large and 2—4 smaller ones between every two tentacles. Sense organs, 16—24 between
every two tentacles (or 2—4 between every two bulbs), Female gonads.

B. Umbrella about 45 mm, in diameter and about five times as broad as high. Stomach
about 23 mm. in diameter, its lower wall fairly flat and the mouth nearly closed. Mouth
circular, 6 mm, in diameter, and the margin with about 54 lips. Radial canals, 69. Ten-
tacles, 34. Marginal bulbs, usually one large and two small bulbs between every two tentacles,
Sense organs, 12—14 between every two tentacles. Male gonads.

C. Umbrella about 75 mm. in diameter and about four times as broad as high. Stomach
about 35 mm. in diameter. Radial canals, 54. Tentacles, 50. Marginal bulbs, usually one
between every two tentacles. Sense organs, 15—20 between every two tentacles. Female
gonads. ,

The lower wall of the stomach varies in width in the different specimens. In one specimen
the mouth is certainly capable of closing up. In the other two specimens the mouth appears
to be fairly wide open, but its exact size is doubtful, as the wall of the stomach is torn
away in places. The oral lips (figs. 8—9) are short and stumpy, with a sinuous margin.
A longitudinal rib runs down the outer side of each lip and on the inner side there is a
groove. The radial canals are deeper than they are broad, and hang down from the sub-

HYDROMEDUSAE. 1[8)

umbrella. The gonads (fig. 6) extend along nearly the whole length of the radial canals,
leaving both ends free. In the male the portion of the canals bearing the gonads is more
tubular than in the female. In the female (fig. 7) the gonads hang down from the wall
of the sub-umbrella and are distinctly bilamellar.

The basal bulbs of the tentacles (figs. 1O—12) are broad hollow sacs and are characterized
by curling over a thickening of the margin of the umbrella. There is an excretory pore
opening from the circular canal opposite each of the basal bulbs of the tentacles and each of
the largest marginal bulbs. The marginal bulbs also curl over the margin of the umbrella
and some of them probably develop tentacles at a later stage in the growth of the medusa,
The sensory vesicles are very minute; their otoliths are not visible.

Genus Mesonema, Eschscholtz, 1829.

Aequoridae with numerous simple, unbranched radial canals. Stomach circular, with lower
wall quite rudimentary. Mouth nearly as large as the diameter of the stomach and cannot
be closed.

Mesonema pensile (Modeer), 1791. (Pl. LV. fig. 4, Pl. LVII. figs. 2—9.)

Medusa, sp. Forskal (1776, p. 9, Tab. XXVIII. fig. B); Medusa coelum pensile, Modeer
(1791, p. 32); Aequorea mesonema, Péron (1809); Mesonema coelum pensile, Eschscholtz (1829) ;
Mesonema pensile, Haeckel (1879).

In Forskal’s Icones rerum naturalium, 1776, there is a good figure of a medusa about
which nothing is stated, except in the description of the figure. There occurs this very brief
statement, “Medusa non descripta. Color coerulescens.”

Modeer gave a short description of the medusa from Forskal’s figure, and called it
Medusa coelum pensile. Péron placed the species in a new genus under the name of Aequorea
mesonema. Eschscholtz removed it from the genus Aequorea to the genus Mesonema and
restored Modeer’s specific name. These early authors suggested the locality for Forskal’s
medusa to be in the Mediterranean, but it must be remembered that Forskal did not state
where he found his specimen, and that his book contains the descriptions of the animals
which he found in the Red Sea, as well as in the Mediterranean.

Haeckel adopted the name Mesonema pensile for Forskal’s medusa, but he gives among the
synonyms Mesonema coerulescens, Kéliiker, 1853, and Stomobrachium mirabile, Kolliker, 1853;
both taken by Kolhker in the Mediterranean. I fail to see the connection between Forskal’s
medusa and Kdlliker’s two species. These are young and intermediate stages, probably belonging
to the genus Aequorea. Haeckel’s description of Mesonema pensile is based upon the description
of three species, and consequently is of little value.

In the Maldive collection there are four medusae which have all the characters of the
medusa figured by Forskal.

Description of the Species. Umbrella almost a solid mass of jelly, rather lke a plano-
convex lens in shape, about twice to three times as broad as high. Sub-umbrella forming
only a fringe round the periphery. Stomach completely rudimentary, its lower wall about
2mm. in length, and its diameter about two-thirds the diameter of the umbrella. Mouth
circular, nearly as large as the diameter of the stomach; non-contractile, and always wide

94—2

734 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

open; its margin furnished with a large number of long narrow lips, which are strengthened
by an external rib. Radial canals about 100—150 in number, very short. Gonads upon all
the radial canals, extending nearly from the stomach to within a short distance of the circular
canal. Tentacles about 10—15, with basal bulbs having a long lateral extension along the
margin of the umbrella. Numerous marginal bulbs, closely packed together, about two to
three between every two radial canals. Marginal sense organs very numerous, about two to
four between every two marginal bulbs.

Size. Umbrella about 60 mm. in length and about 30 mm. in height.
Distribution. Indian Ocean, Maldive Is., Haddumati and Goifurfehendu (Gardiner).

The collection contains four specimens :

A. Umbrella 45 mm. in width and 20 mm. in height. Stomach 26 mm. in diameter.
Radial canals about 120. Tentacles, 10. Marginal bulbs about 12 between every two tentacles.

B. Umbrella about 60 mm. in width and 25 mm. in height. Radial canals about 100.
Tentacles 10, perhaps more. This specimen is in bad condition; the margin of the umbrella
damaged and the mouth torn away.

C. Umbrella about 60 mm. in width and 30 mm. in height. Radial canals estimated
at 150. Tentacles 15. The specimen is in bad condition.

D. Umbrella about 60 mm. in width and about 20 mm. in height. Mouth 43 mm. in
diameter. Radial canals about 148, their length about 10 mm. Tentacles 13.

The thickness of the umbrella (fig. 2) is so great that the sub-umbrella cavity is reduced
to a mere shallow depression round the margin of the umbrella. The oral lips (fig. 9) are
long and thin, about 3 mm. in length, without a sinuous margin. On the external side of
every lip there is a longitudinal rib, which extends into the wall of the stomach, and on
the inner side a corresponding groove. There are about as many oral lips as radial canals.
The gonads (fig. 4) are situated on both sides of every radial canal and do not hang down
in bands or folds. The tentacles are few in number and are not arranged at equal distances
apart. Their basal bulbs (figs. 6—8) have long lateral extensions along the margin of the
umbrella. The marginal bulbs (fig. 5) are very minute and have at their apex a circular
cluster of nematocysts.

In my account of Aequorea norvegica (1903) I made the following statement: “The exact
shape of the stomach and whether the mouth is open or closed are scarcely suitable for
generic characters. The fact that an Aequorid is occasionally caught with its mouth open is
no evidence that it is permanently kept open.” This statement must now be modified. It
referred to the genera Aequorea and Polycanna and with them it probably holds good, as
neither has a rudimentary stomach. All the species of the Aequoridae, which I had then
seen, possessed a mouth capable of closing up, but since I have seen these Maldive specimens
my statement about the exact shape of the stomach for a generic character becomes untenable.

The stomach is quite rudimentary and is practically absent, as its lower wall is only
about 2 mm. in length, so that the mouth must always remain wide open. It appears to me
that the function of the stomach has been removed to the canal system. The medusa probably
lives upon organisms of microscopic dimensions, such as unicellular algae and protozoa, which
are picked up by the endoderm cells lining the canal system. The water containing these
organisms, after circulating im the canal system, probably passes out through the numerous

HYDROMEDUSAE. 735

pores on the circular canal. The Aequoridae which have a large funnel-shaped stomach and
a closeable mouth may also have the radial canals functioning as digestive organs. The con-
traction of the stomach, when the mouth is closed, would drive water into the canal system
and expel the stale water through the pores on the circular canal. The hypothesis that the
radial canals function as the digestive organs would perhaps account for the large number
usually present in the Aequoridae, some of which are the largest Leptomedusae known.

Order TRACHOMEDUSAE.
Family Petasidae, Haeckel, 1877.

Family Character. Trachomedusae with four radial canals, upon which are situated
cylindrical, globular, or papilliform gonads. Stomach without a peduncle. Hither external
sensory clubs, or external or internal sensory vesicles.

Haeckel (1879) divided the Petasidae into two subfamilies, namely :

Petnachnidae, without blind centripetal canals. Genera: Petasus, Dipetasus, Petasata,
Petachnum, Aglauropsis and Crossea.

Olindiadae, with blind centripetal canals. Genus: Olindias.

Since Haeckel published his System der Medusen three more genera must be added to
the family, namely, Gonionemus (placed by Haeckel among the Thaumantidae under a wrongly
spelt generic name Gonynema), Gonionemoides and Vallentinia.

A more natural ciassification of the Petasidae can, I think, be obtained by taking the
structure of the sense organs instead of the centripetal canals for the characters of the two
subfamilies.

There are two distinct types of sense organs:

A. Sensory clubs (Hérkélbchen) with a short stalk, which project from the margin of
the umbrella; with a single otolith and with external sensory hairs. These sensory clubs are
present in the genera Petasus, Diptasus, Petasata, Petnachnum? (species not figured).

B. Sensory vesicles (Hoérblaschen) situated either in the mesogloea (internal) or on the
margin of the umbrella (external); sessile and without external sensory hairs. These sensory
vesicles are present in the genera Aglauropsis, Gossea, Olindias, Gonionemus, Gonionemoides
and Vallentinia.

On this classification the arrangement of the genera would be as follows:

Subfamily Petachnidae, Haeckel, 1877.

Petasidae with sensory clubs containing an otolith and with external sensory hairs.
Genus Petasus. Species—P. atavus, P. tetranema.
Genus Dipetasus. Species—D. digonimus.
Genus Petasata. Species—P. eucope.
Genus ? Petachnum. Species—P. tiaropsis.

All the above genera and species were described by Haeckel (1879), and I have not
succeeded in finding any notice of their bemg recorded by any other person.

736 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

Subfamily Olindiadae, Haeckel, 1877.

Petasidae with sensory vesicles situated either in the substance of the umbrella (internal),
or on the margin of the umbrella (external); sessile, and without external sensory hairs.

Genus Aglauropsis, F. Miiller, 1865.

Generic Character. Petasidae with numerous uniform tentacles, without adhesive disks,
and not arranged in groups.

A. agassizti, Miiller, 1865. South Atlantic; Brazil.
A. conantii, Browne, 1903. South Atlantic; Falkland Is.

Miiller’s description of Aglauropsis agassizti is very incomplete, in fact, he only gives
generic characters. The specific name should either be attached to the next Aglauropsis
found on the coast of Brazil, or else placed on the obsolete list.

Maeotias inexpectata, Ostroumoff, 1896. Ostroumoff has published a brief preliminary Latin
description of this genus and species in the Zool. Anzeiger, 1896, and a full description with
figures, in the Bulletin of the Imperial Academy of Sciences of St Petersburg, 1896. Unfor-
tunately the text of the latter publication is wholly in Russian, and the chief figure is
rendered useless by the tentacles being represented merely by a series of closely ruled lines,
Ostroumoff points out that the genus differs from Olindias in possessing only flexible ten-
tacles, which all hang down from the margin of the umbrella. There are about 300 hollow
flexible tentacles, about 100 marginal bulbs, about 200 internal sense organs arranged in
pairs, about 13 to 15 centripetal canals m each quadrant, and gonads along nearly the whole
length of the radial canals. Distribution. Europe; Sea of Azov. As I am uncertain about
the structure of the tentacles I have not included this species in the genus Aglauropsis,
as it may perchance belong to one of the other genera.

Genus Gossea, L. Agassiz, 1862.

Generic Character. Petasidae with uniform tentacles arranged in eight groups (four
perradial and four interradial) and a few small isolated tentacles between the groups.

G. corynetes (Gosse), 1853. North Atlantic, British Isles. Syn. G. circinata, Haeckel,
1879. North Atlantic; France.

Genus Olindias F. Miiller, 1861.

Generic Character. Petasidae with numerous tentacles, of which there are two distinct
kinds. A series (primary) of short stiff tentacles, which are carried outwards and have their
bases attached to the ex-umbrella; and a series (secondary) of long flexible tentacles, which
hang downwards from the margin of the umbrella. No adhesive disks on any of the tentacles.

O. sambaquiensis, Miiller, 1861. South Atlantic; Brazil.

O. miilleri, Haeckel, 1879. Mediterranean.

HYDROMEDUSAE. 737

O. tenwis (Mayer), 1900. Tropical Atlantic; Florida. Syn. Halicalyx tenuis, Mayer (1900,
p- 63, Pls. V.—VI.). ? Halicalyx tenuis, Fewkes (1882, p. 277, Pl. VIL).

There is a disagreement in the descriptions given by Fewkes and by Mayer of Halicalyx
tenuis. Fewkes states that the medusa has twelve tentacles, uniform in shape, with a single
otolth at the base of each one. Mayer describes his specimens with two distinct kinds of
tentacles and a pair of sense organs at the base of each primary tentacle, and also with
many centripetal canals, which are not mentioned by Fewkes. Fewkes’s specimen cannot be
an early stage because the gonads are described and figured, though it may be an inter-
mediate stage in growth. I can understand Fewkes’s instituting a new genus for his species,
because it does not agree with the generic character of Olindias, and at that date the genus
Aglauropsis was very vaguely described on an incomplete description of a single species.
It is just possible that Fewkes’s specimen belongs to the genus Aglawropsis. Mayer's
beautiful figures of Halicalyx tenuis show all the characters of an Olindias.

Olindias singularis, species nova. (Pl. LVI. fig. 2, Pl. LVII. fig. 1.)

Description. Umbrella hemispherical, with thick walls, about one and a half times as
broad as high. Stomach about half as long as the cavity of the umbrella: mouth with four
lips having a sinuous margin. Four radial canals: four to five blind centripetal canals in
each quadrant. Gonads on the outer half of each radial canal, and separated into isolated
papilliform clusters. Two kinds of tentacles; primary tentacles which are carried outwards
and have their bases attached to the margin of the ex-umbrella, and secondary tentacles
which hang downwards from the margin of the umbrella. About 7—10 primary tentacles and
4—5 secondary tentacles in each quadrant. About 8—10 globular marginal bulbs containing
nematocysts in each quadrant. One internal sensory vesicle containing a single otolith at the
base of each primary tentacle.

Size. Umbrella 13 mm. in width and 8 mm. in height.

Distribution. Indian Ocean: Maldive Is., Suvadiva (Gardiner).

The collection contains a single specimen in a good state of preservation. It mainly
differs from the species hitherto described in possessing only one sense organ at the base of
each primary tentacle, instead of a pair of sense organs. The possession of a pair of sense
organs has been considered by Haeckel to be a part of the generic character. I think that
the position of the sense organs, external or internal, and the number of sense organs had
better not be included in the generic characters, but would be of more use for specific
characters. Haeckel states that Olindias miilleri found in the Mediterranean has, in addition
to the internal paired sensory vesicles, a series of club-shaped ocelli situated between the
marginal bulbs. I have examined large adult specimens from Naples and have failed to find
any ocelli.

In Olindias singularis the primary tentacles are curved outwards from the margin of the
umbrella. Their bases are partly enclosed by an overgrowth of the ex-umbrella, to which
they are attached for a short distance. These tentacles have either oblong or short spiral
bands of nematocysts, and at their free end there is a claw-shaped termination, which has
its margin closely packed with very long nematocysts. The secondary tentacles are hollow
(like the primary ones) and hang down from the margin of the umbrella. They have a
large basal bulb and numerous bands of nematocysts, forming about three-quarter circular

738 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

loops, but not meeting on the inner side. The marginal bulbs are large hollow balls in
direct communication with the circular canal, and are externally covered with nematocysts.

Genus Gonionemus, A. Agassiz, 1862.

Generic Character. Petasidae with numerous uniform tentacles, each having an adhesive
disk.

G. vertens, A. Agassiz, 1862. North Pacific; British Columbia.
G. suavaensis, Agassiz and Mayer, 1899. ‘Tropical Pacific; Fiji.
G. aphrodite, Mayer, 1894 and 1900. Tropical Atlantic; Florida.

G. agassizii, Murbach and Shearer, 1903, North Pacific; Aleutian Is. and Japan (Kirk-
patrick, 1903).

G. murbachii, Mayer, 1901. North Atlantic; Massach. U.S.A.
G. pelagicus, Bigelow, 1904. Indian Ocean; Maldive Is.

Genus Gonionemoides, Mayer, 1900.

Generic Character. Petasidae with numerous tentacles, of which there are two distinct
kinds. <A series (primary) with adhesive disks and another series (secondary) without adhesive
disks and with more numerous and larger bands of nematocysts.

G. geophila, Mayer, 1900. Tropical Atlantic; Florida.

Genus Vallentinia, Browne, 1902.

Generic Character. Petasidae with two distinct kinds of tentacles. Four solid perradial
tentacles with terminal suckers, and many hollow tentacles with bands of nematocysts, but
without suckers.

V. falklandica, Browne, 1902. South Atlantic; Falkland Is,

Family Geryonidae, Eschscholtz, 1829.

Trachomedusae with four or six radial canals, in the course of which are situated leaf-
shaped gonads. Blind centripetal canals. Stomach on a long peduncle. Internal sensory
vesicles.

Genus Liriope, Lesson, 1843.

Generic Character. Geryonidae with four radial canals and with four or eight tentacles.

Liriope tetraphylla (Chamisso et Eysenhardt), 1820. (Pl. LIV. fig. 3.)

Geryona tetraphylla, Chamisso et Eysenhardt (1820, p. 357, Pl. XX VIL). Liriantha tetra-
phylla, Haeckel (1879). Liriope tetraphylla, Vanhiffen (1902, p. 82, Taf. x.).

HYDROMEDUSAE. 739

There is only one specimen in the collection, and a figure is given of it because I am
not certain about the correctness of the identification. Liriope tetraphylla has, according to
Vanhoffen, a very wide geographical distribution, as it was found by the “ Valdivia” in the
Atlantic, Indian Ocean, and the Red Sea. The specimens showed a considerable variation in
the shape and size of the umbrella, in the length of the peduncle, and in the position and
shape of the gonads; all of which have been used by other authors for specific characters.

Description of the specimen. Umbrella hemispherical, very thick, about twice as broad
as high. Stomach on a cylindrical peduncle. Gonads rhomboidal, broader than long, on the
distal half of the radial canals and extending nearly to the margin of the umbrella. The
distance between the gonads about equal to their breadth. Four perradial tentacles. Three
centripetal canals in each quadrant. Eight sense organs.

Size. Umbrella 7 mm. in width and 44 mm. in height. Peduncle 3 mm. in length.

Locality. Indian Ocean; Maldive Is. (Gardiner).

Family Aglauridae, L. Agassiz, 1862.

Trachomedusae with eight radial canals, in the course of which are situated eight gonads,
Stomach on a peduncle. Numerous uniform tentacles. Sense organs external and free.

Genus Aglaura, Péron et Lesueur, 1806.

Generic Character. Aglauridae with gonads situated upon the peduncle of the stomach.

Aglaura hemistoma, Péron et Lesueur, 1809.

Aglaura hemistoma, Gegenbaur (1856, p. 248, Taf. vir.); Haeckel (1879, p. 275, Taf. xv1.);
Maas (1893, p. 25, Taf. 1.); Mayer (1900, p. 65, Pl. XXV.); Vanhoffen (1902, p. 78).

The collection contains a single small specimen, which is not in very good condition.
The shape of the umbrella is very much hke that of the figures given by Haeckel and
by Mayer.

Description. Umbrella with a short conical summit, about 24 mm. in length and width.
Stomach roundish, on a very short peduncle. Mouth with four lips. Eight sausage-shaped
gonads, about 1 mm. in length, situated on the peduncle and adjacent to the stomach. Ova
visible. Tentacles estimated at about 64, Sense organs not seen; the margin of the umbrella
is damaged.

Distribution. In the warm waters of the Atlantic, Indian Ocean, and the Red Sea.

Amphogona, genus novum.

Generic Character. Aglauridae with gonads situated upon the sub-umbrella. Gonads
bisexual. Umbrella much broader than high.

Gi, ie 95

740 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

Amphogona apsteini (Vanhoffen), 1902. (Pl. LIV. fig. 5, Pl. LV. fig. 5, Pl. LVI. fig. 1,
Pl. LVII. figs. 10—15.)

Pantachogon apsteini, Vanhoffen (1902, p. 65, Taf. x. fig. 18, Taf. x1. fig. 28).

The genus Pantachogon was instituted by Maas (1893) for a species (P. haeckelii) found
in the North Atlantic. This medusa has a series of spindle-shaped gonads along nearly the
whole length of the radial canals. The stomach is not situated upon a peduncle, and the
genus belongs to the Trachynemidae. Vanhdéffen has slightly altered Maas’ original definition
of the genus for the inclusion of his new species, P. apsteini, found on the west coast of
Sumatra. This species has oval gonads near the margin of the umbrella, and the stomach
is situated upon a distinct peduncle. It has the characters of the Aglauridae.

The specimens in this collection agree very closely with the description and figures of
Pantachogon apsteini, and I believe that they belong to that species. According to the
classification adopted by Haeckel, and by Maas, the Maldive specimens would belong to the
genus Agliscra, as the eight gonads are upon the sub-umbrella. But in one respect, however,
there is a considerable difference. The shape of the umbrella is unlike that of the Aglauridae,
and is more like that of the Trachynemidae. In Agliscra the umbrella is about twice as
high as broad, whereas in the Maldive specimens the umbrella is about two to three times
as broad as high. If one imagined an Agliscra with its umbrella flattened out then it
would resemble this species. I do not think that the Maldive specimens or Vanhdften’s
specimens belong to the genus Pantachogon of Maas, as they are not like the type species,
P. haeckelii. ‘They show a nearer relationship to Agliscra. I think it is best to institute
a new genus, to which I give the name Amphogona (duda-yovn) and place it in the
family Aglauridae.

Specific Characters. Umbrella saucer-shaped, with thin walls, about twice to three
times as broad as high. Velum fairly broad. Stomach small, situated on a short peduncle.
Mouth with four thick lps. Eight radial canals. Eight globular or oval gonads, situated
upon the radial canals near the margin of the umbrella; bisexual, male and female gonads
upon alternating canals. About 70 or more tentacles, uniform in shape. Sense organs
external, ?16.

Size. Umbrella 44 mm. in width and 12 mm. in length (the largest specimen).

Distribution. Indian Ocean; West coast of Sumatra (Vanhéffen); Maldive Islands, Mila-
dumadulu (Gardiner).

The collection contains three specimens.

A. An intermediate stage. Umbrella 24 mm. in width and 14 mm. in height. Stomach
a little longer than the peduncle, which measured 0:25 mm. Gonads just beginning to develop
and varying slightly in size. About six tentacles and one sense organ in each octant.

B. An immature adult. Umbrella 4 mm. in width and 14 mm. in height. Stomach
on a peduncle, which measured 0°6 mm. in length. Eight globular gonads, male and female
on alternating canals, all about the same size and shape. Tentacles, 57. Sense organs, 10
(six octants with one sense organ and two octants with two sense organs).

C. An adult. Umbrella 44 mm. in width and 1% mm. in height. Stomach on a peduncle,

which measured about 0°5 mm. in length, and twice as long as the stomach. Eight oval
gonads, male and female on alternating canals. Tentacles, 74 (the following numbers in each

HYDROMEDUSAE. 741

octant: 9, 10, 9, 9, 10, 9, 9, 9). Sense organs, 14 (the followmg numbers in each octant:
1, 1, 2, 2, 3, 1, 2, 2). Im this specimen the gonads vary very much in size. Two pairs,
male and female, oppositely situated and fully developed, are large; the other two pairs are
very small.

Vanhdffen’s figures show that the gonads are very unequal in size. Four are large
and four are very small, looking as if they were just beginning to develop. The large and
small gonads occur on alternating radial canals. Vanhéffen does not state the sex of the
gonads, but the largest look immature in his figure. In the smallest Maldive specimen, much
younger than Vanhdffen’s specimens, the gonads are just beginning to develop. They vary
shghtly in size, showing that they have not all started to develop at the same time, but
the sizes are not arranged in any definite order. In the second specimen the gonads are
all about the same size and shape, but not quite fully developed. In the largest specimen
there is a well-marked difference in the size of the gonads, which are arranged in pairs,
male and female, two large and two small, so that the large and small are not upon alternating
canals. The male and female gonads are always upon alternating canals, but in these specimens
there is no evidence to show that one sex is in advance of the other, though the gonads are
not all of a size.

The occurrence of both male and female gonads upon the same individual is the most
interesting character of this species, for, so far as I know, hermaphroditism has not been
hitherto recorded for any Craspedote medusa.

Order NARCOMEDUSAE.
Family Aeginidae, Gegenbaur, 1856.
Genus Solmundella, Haeckel, 1879.

Generic Character. Aeginidae with two tentacles and with a stomach having eight
pouches.

Solmundella bitentaculata (Quoy et Gaimard) 1833. (Pl. LVI. fig. 3.)

Charybdea bitentaculata, Quoy et Gaimard (1833, Tom. Iv. p. 295, Pl. xxv. figs. 4—5).
Aeginella bitentaculata, Haeckel (1879).

Description. Umbrella somewhat cone-shaped, a little broader than high. Stomach circular,
nearly as wide as the umbrella, having lateral pouches about twice as broad as high, containing
the gonads. Four radial canals. Two opposite, non-contractile tentacles, which are situated
above the stomach and are about three times longer than the diameter of the umbrella.
Sixteen sense organs, each with a single otolith.

Size. Umbrella 3} mm. in width and about 3 mm. in height.
Length of the tentacles about 6—10 mm.

Distribution. Indian Ocean; Maldive Islands, Minikoi (Gardiner, 3 Aug. 1899). Austra-
lasian Seas; Amboina Is. (Quoy et Gaimard).
95—2

742 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

Maas (1904) has just published a prelimimary revision ot the genera belonging to the
Cunanthidae and Aeginidae, but a revision of their species is not given. Maas proposes to
unite the genera Aeginella and Solmundella, and to transfer the latter genus from the Solmaridae
to the Aeginidae. This classification I have adopted. (See p. 745.)

SIPHONOPHORA.
Order CALYCOPHORAE, Leuckart.
Family Diphyidae, Eschscholtz, 1829.

Genus Diphyes, Cuvier, 1817.

Generic Characters. Diphyidae with two angular, slenderly pyramidal nectophores,
of similar form and subequal size, one placed behind the other. The first nectophore with a
conical or campanulate hydroecium. Cormidia without special nectophores. Bracts pyramidal,
conical or spathiform, with a pointed apex. Phyllocyst simple, usually large and ovate, without
radial canals.

Diphyes chamissonis, Huxley, 1859. (Pl. LIV. fig. 6.)
Diphyes chamissonis, Huxley (1859, p. 36, Pl. I. fig. 3).

There are five anterior nectophores in the collection and as they are more lke Huxley’s
figures of Diphyes chamissonis than any other species that I know of, I have placed them
under this name.

Description of the Specimens. The nectophore is about 10—12 mm. in length, 4 mm.
in width and 3 mm. in depth. It is a long slender pyramid, slightly more curved on the
posterior side than on the anterior. The ex-umbrella has three prominent ridges without
serrations; one anterior and two lateral which are situated over the nectosac. The posterior
side of the ex-umbrella is flat. The shape of nectophore is not exactly lke Huxley’s figure ;
as it 1s not quite so broad and it tapers more towards the apex.

The nectosac is nearly as long as the umbrella, cylindrical and tapering towards its apex
almost to a point. The nectocalycine canal runs a considerable distance down the hydroecium
and enters the nectosac not far from its mouth. Here it joms a pair of radial canals which
run up nearly to the top of the nectosac, then curve over and descend to the circular canal.
There is also a short radial canal which runs down from the junction of the nectocalycine canal
to the circular canal. The mouth of the nectosac is protected by three short triangular teeth,
which have slightly serrated edges.

The hydroecium extends about half way up the umbrella. It is somewhat triangular
in shape and has a conspicuous constriction near its mouth. At this point the aperture is nearly
circular.

The somatocyst is cylindrical in shape and tapers down towards the hydroecium. One
specimen has a small oval somatocyst, but in the other specimens the somatocyst is cylindrical
and shows only a slight variation in length and shape. At the top of the somatocyst there
is a small yellowish body, irregular in shape, which is probably the remains of an oleocyst.

HYDROMEDUSAE. 743

The siphosome in nearly all the specimens is contracted within the hydroecium, but in
one specimen it 1s more expanded, so that the cormidia are more easily seen. The eudoxomes
have a spathiform bract, just like Huxley’s figure in shape, a siphon and a contracted tentacle.

Distribution. Pacific Ocean; Kast coast of Australia, and the Louisiade Archipelago
(Huxley). Indian Ocean; Maldive Is. Minikoi (Gardiner, 3rd Aug. 1899).

Genus Diphyopsis, Haeckel, 1888.

Generic Characters. Diphyidae with two angular, slenderly pyramidal nectophores
of similar form and subequal size, one placed behind the other. First nectophore with a conical
or campanulate hydroecium. Each cormidium with a special nectophore. Bracts pyramidal,
conical or spathiform, with a pointed apex. Phyllocyst simple, ovate, without radial canals,

Diphyopsis campanulifera (Eschscholtz), 1829.

Diphyes campanulifera, Eschscholtz (1829, p. 137). Diphyopsis compressa, Haeckel (1888,
p. 153, PL XXXIIL.). Diphyopsis campanulifera, Chun (1897, p. 26). Diphyopsis campanulifera,
Mayer (1900, p. 75, Pl. XXVIIL).

Sexual generation. Hrsaea lessonii (Huxley), 1859. Hudowia lessonii, Huxley (1859, p. 57,
Pl. IIL.). Hrsaea compressa, Haeckel (1888, p. 123, Pl. XX XIV.).

There are about a dozen specimens in the collection and all have the anterior and posterior
nectophores isolated.

The shape of the anterior nectophore is like the figure given by Mayer. The teeth round
the mouth of the nectosac have nearly a smooth edge, with just a few fine denticulations near
the apex. The largest nectophore.measured 13 mm. in length. A few of the specimens have
the siphosome well expanded and the cormidia are clearly shown.

The largest posterior nectophore measured 17 mm, in length, 7 mm. in breadth and 5 mm,
in thickness. The teeth of the nectosac are smooth.

A few specimens of the Eudoxia stage were found. One resembles Huxley’s figure of
Hudowia lessoniv.

Distribution. Atlantic Ocean; Tropical and subtropical regions. Australasian Seas ;
Amboina Is. (Bedot). Indian Ocean; Minikoi (Gardiner, 3rd Aug. 1899),

Genus Abyla, Quoy et Gaimard, 1827,
Abyla trigona, Quoy et Gaimard, 1827.

Abyla carina, Haeckel (1888, p. 156, Pl. XXXV.). Abyla trigona, Chun (1897, p. 31).

There is a single anterior nectophore resembling very closely Haeckel’s figure (Haeckel,
Pl. XXXV. fig. 5). It differs only in having a slightly flatter apex and the lateral wings
project a little further out. The positions of the nectosac, the somatocyst, and the hydroecium
correspond exactly to the position of these organs in Haeckel’s figure of Abyla carina. The
posterior nectophore was not found,

Distribution. Atlantic Ocean, Tropical and subtropical regions. Indian Ocean; Maldive Is.
Miladumadulu (Gardiner).

744 : EDWARD T. BROWNE.

Order PHYSOPHORAE, Eschscholtz, 1829.
Family Agalmidae.
Genus Agalmopsis, Sars, 1846.

There is only one specimen. It is badly contracted and has lost all the nectophores and
bracts. The tricornuate tentilla are large. I have not been able to identify the species. Bedot
has found Agalmopsis sarsi off the Amboina Islands.

Family Physalidae, Brandt, 1835.
Physalia utriculus, Eschscholtz, 1829.
Physalia utriculus, Huxley (1859, p. 101, Pl. X., Pl. XII. fig. 12).

About two dozen specimens in the collection. The float of the smallest specimen is about
4 mm. in length and 2 mm. in depth. It has one tentacle and a few siphons and_ palpons.
A specimen with a float measuring 8 mm. in length and 4 mm. in depth has a crest on the
top of the float and a few internal transverse septa; one main tentacle and one secondary
tentacle much smaller in size; several siphons and palpons; and the gonophores just beginning
to develop. The largest specimens are about 20—25 mm. in length and 15—20 mm. in depth
and have one main tentacle and several secondary tentacles. Numerous siphons and palpons.
The gonophores are fairly well advanced in development. These large specimens resemble
Huxley’s figure of Physalia utriculus.

Distribution. Tropical and Pacific and Indian Oceans (Huxley). Maldive Is., Minikoi.
Laccadive Is. (Gardiner).

Family Velellidae, Eschscholtz, 1829.
Genus Velella, Lamarck, 1819.

The collection contains a single small specimen about 13 mm. in length having a
triangular sail about 7 mm. in height. The tentacles are arranged in a single row round
the margin of the umbrella. The gonophores are beginning to develop on the gonostyles.
The specimen from its size and the appearance of the gonophores is an intermediate stage.
Until the Velellidae have been revised it is impossible to identify an intermediate stage.

University College, London, 22nd April, 1904.

A paper by H. B. Bigelow on “Medusae from the Maldive Islands,’ published in the
Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College (Vol. xxx1x. No. 9,
April, 1904) arrived in London whilst I was revising the proofs of my paper. The author,
along with Prof. A. Agassiz, visited the Maldive Islands during the months of December, 1901
and January, 1902. Special attention was given to the Medusae and the drawings of the
species were made from life. The list of Hydromedusae contains 22 species, eleven of which
are described and figured as new species. Not one of the species, which I have described
as new, was taken during this expedition.

HYDROMEDUSAE. 745

I have also just received from the Concilium Bibliographicum at Zurich the title of the
following paper, “The Craspedote Medusa Olindias and some of its Natural Allies,” 1903,
in The Mark Anniversary Volume, pp. 1—22, 3 pls. I have been unable to find a copy
of this book in the Scientific Libraries in London.

Whilst my manuscript was in the hands of the printer I examined about 40 specimens
of Solmundella bitentaculata taken by Prof. Herdman at Ceylon. These specimens show that
the shape of the umbrella is variable. One of them has the top of the umbrella very
much like the original figure of the species given by Quoy and Gaimard. In the largest
specimens there are three sense organs in each octant, but the smaller ones have only two
sense organs in each octant. I consider the Maldive specimens to be an intermediate stage
in development. Bigelow found Aeginella dissonema, Haeckel, at the Maldives, and as this
species is widely distributed, it is probably identical with Solmundella bitentaculata. Maas
(1904) has pointed out that Aeginella is the name of a Crustacean genus and that it cannot
be used for a medusa.

24th May, 1904.

LITERATURE.

Agassiz, A. 1865. “North American Acalephae.” Catalogue Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, No. u.
Cambridge, U.S.A.

Agassiz, A., and Mayer, A.G. 1899. “Acalephs from the Fiji Islands.” Memoirs Mus. Comp. Zool.
Harvard, Vol. xxxu. pp. 157—189, 17 Plates.

1902. “Reports on the Scientific Results of the Expedition to the Tropical
Pacific...in the Albatross, Part 11. Medusae.” Memoirs Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, Vol. xxvt.
pp. 189—176, Pls. 1—xi1.

Agassiz, L. 1860—1862. Contributions to the Natural History of the United States oy America,
Vols. 11—1v. Boston.

Autman, G. J. 1871—1872. Monograph on the Gymnoblastic or Tubularian Hydroids. Ray Soe.
London.

Bepor, M. 1896. ‘Les Siphonophores de la Baie d’Amboine. Etude suivie d’une Révision de la
famille des Agalmidae.” Revue Suisse Zool, Tom. m1. pp. 367—414, Pl. xu.

Brarnvitte, H. M. pe. 1834. Manuel d’Actinologie ou de Zoophytologie. Paris.
Branpt, J. F, 1835. ‘‘Prodromus descriptiones animalium ab H. Mertensio observatorum.” Recueil
des Actes Acad. Imp. Sct. St Pétersbourg (1834).

1838. “ Ausfiihrliche Beschreibung der von C. H. Mertens auf seiner Weltumsegelung
beobachteten Schirmquallen, nebst allgemeinen Bemerkungen die Schirmquallen tiberhaupt von
J. KF. Brandt.” Mém. Acad. Imp. St Pétersbourg, Sér. 6, Tom, u. (Sci. Nat.), pp. 237—411.
Taf. I—xxXXI.

Brooks, W. K. 1880. “Budding in Free Medusae.” American Naturalist, Vol. x1v. pp. 670—671.

= 1882. “List of Medusae found at Beaufort, North Carolina, during the Summers of
1880—1881.” Studies Biol. Lab. Johns Hopkins Univ. Vol. 1. pp. 135—146.

746 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

Browne, E. T. 1896. ‘On British Hydroids and Medusae.” Proc, Zool. Soc. 1896, pp. 459—500.
Pls, xvi—xvu. London,

— 1898. ‘On British Medusae.” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1897, pp. 816—835, Pls. xtvimI—xuix.

—— 1902. “A Preliminary Report on Hydromedusae from the Falkland Islands.” Ann. and
Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 7, Vol. 1x. pp. 272—284.

Cuamisso, A. DE, et EysenHArptT, C. G. 1820. ‘De Animalibus quibusdam e Olasse Vermium
Linneana in circumnavigatione Terrae...annis 1815—18 peracta, observatis.” Nova Acta K. Leop.
Carol. Deutsch. Akad. Naturforscher, Bd x.

Cuun, C. 1897. ‘Die Siphonophoren der Plankton-Expedition.” Hrgebnisse der Plankton-Expedition,
“ National,” Bd u. K. g. 126 pages, 5 Taf.

5

Escuscuoutz, F, 1829. System der Acalephen. Berlin.

Fewkes, J. W. 1882. “Notes on Acalephs from the Tortugas, with a description of New Genera.
and Species.” Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard, Vol. 1x. pp. 251—290, Pls. 1—vi1.

1882. ‘On the Acalephae of the East Coast of New England.” Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool.
Harvard, Vol. 1x. pp. 291—310, Pl. 1.

— 1889. ‘New Invertebrata from the Coast of California.” Bull. Hssea Institute, Vol. xx1.
pp. 99—146, Pls. 1—vi1. Salem, U.S.A.

Forses, E. 1846. “On the Pulmograde Medusae of the British Seas.” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.
Ser. 1, Vol. xvi. pp. 284—287.

— 1848. A Monograph of the British Naked-Eyed Medusae. Ray Soc. London.

—_— 1851. “On a Species of Aequorea inhabiting the British Seas.” Proc. Zool. Soe.
pp. 272—275, Pl. tv.

GEGENBAUR, C. 1856. ‘Versuch eines Systemes der Medusen.” Zeztschr. wiss, Zool. Bd vit. pp. 202—
Diiosmel cube Vil Xe

Gossz, P. H. 1853. A Naturalist's Rambles on the Devonshire Coast. London.

—— 1857. “On a new form of Corynoid Polypes.” Trans. Linn. Soc. Vol. xxu. pp. 113—116,
Pl. xx. London,

Harcker, E. 1879—1880. Das System der Medusen. Jena.
—— 1888. “Report on the Siphonophorae.” Challenger Reports, Vol. xxvii.

Hincxs, T. 1872. “On the Hydroid Lar sabellarum Gosse, and its Reproduction.” Ann. and Mag.
Nat. Hist. Ser. 4, Vol. x. pp. 313—317, Pl. x1x.

Huxtry, T. H. 1859. Zhe Oceanic Hydrozoa. Ray Soc. London.
a 1877. A Manual of the Anatomy of Invertebrated Animals. London.

Kirkpatrick, R. 1903. ‘Notes on some Medusae from Japan.” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 7,
Vol. xu. pp. 615—62]1, 1 Plate.

Lesson, R. P. 1843. Histoire naturelle des Zoophytes Acaléphes. Paris.

Maas, O. 1893. “Die craspedoten Medusen.” Ergebnisse der Plankton-Expedition, ‘ National,”
Bd u. K. ec. 107 pages, 8 Taf.

— 1904. ‘* Révision des Méduses appartenant aux Familles des Cunanthidae et des Aeginidae,
et groupement nouveau des genres.” Bull. Mus. Océanographique de Monaco, No. 5, 8 pages.

HYDROMEDUSAE. 747

Mayer, A. G. 1901. “The Variations of a Newly-arisen Species of Medusa (Pseudoclytia pentata).”
Sci. Bull. Mus. Brooklyn Instit. Vol. 1. pp. 1—27, 2 Plates. (In this paper Gonionemus murbachii
is mentioned as a new species.)

1900. “Some Medusae from the Tortugas, Florida.” Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard,
Vol. xxxvit. pp. 11-—-82, Pls. 1—xtiv.

McCrapy, J. 1858. ‘“Gymnophthalmata of Charleston Harbour.” Proc. Elliott Soc. Vol. 1. pp. 103—
221, Pls. virr—-xu1. Charleston, U.S.A.

Mit irr, F. 1861. “Polypen und Quallen von Santa Catharina.” Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte,
pp. 312—319, Taf. 1x.

1865. ‘Ueber die Randblaschen der Hydroidquallen (Aglawropsis).” Archiv fiir Mikro.
Anat. Bd 1. pp. 143—147, Taf. vu.

Mursacu, L., and Surarer, C. 1902. “Preliminary Report on a Collection of Medusae from the
Coast of British Columbia and Alaska.” Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 7, Vol. 1x. pp. 71—73.
London.

1903. “On Medusae from the Coast of British Columbia and Alaska.” Proc.
Zool. Soc. 1903, Vol. 11. pp. 164—192, Pls. xvii—xxu. London.

Osrroumorr, A. 1896. ‘Zwei neue Relicten-Gattungen im Azowschen Meere.” Zool. dAnzeiger,
Bd xrx. p. 30.

—.- 1896. ‘Résultats scientifiques de lexpédition d’Atmanai” (Russian text), Bull. Acad.

Imp. Sci. St Pétersb. Ser. 5, Vol. tv. pp. 389—408, 1 Plate.

Pracu, C. W. “On New British Naked-Eyed Medusae.” Journ. 2. Instit. Cornwall, Vol. u. pp. 355—
360, Pls. 1—1. Truro.

Péron, F. et Lesutur, C. 1809. ‘Tableau des Caractéres génériques et spécifiques de toutes les
Espéces de Méduses.” Ann. Mus. Hist. Nat. Tom. xiv. pp. 325—366. Paris.

Quoy, J. R. et Garmarp, P. 1833. ‘“ Voyage de découvertes de ? Astrolabe.” Zoologie, Tom, tv. Paris.

VANHOFFEN, E. 1902. ‘ Die craspedoten Medusen der deutschen Tiefsee-Expedition, Valdivia.”
Wissen. Ergebnisse, Bd ui. pp. 53—86, Taf. 1x—x11.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATES.

Reference Letters.

CC. = Circular canal. St. = Stomach.

G. = Gonads. S. = Sense organ.
Or. = Oral lips. T. = Tentacle.

NV. = Nematocysts. U. = Umbrella.

P, =Excretory pore. V. = Velum.

Rk. = Radial canals. X, = Ex-Umbrella.

All the figures were made from specimens in formalin.

PLATE LIV.

Fie. 1. Proboscidactyla varians sp. n. Oral view. x 25. (p.

~
bo
ie)
a

Fie. 2. Lateral view of a tentacle of Proboscidactyla varians.
G. IL. 96

748 EDWARD T. BROWNE.

Fic. 3. Liriope tetraphylla (Chamisso et HEysenhardt), x10. (p. 738.)

Fic. 4. Phialidiwm tenve sp. n. Oral view. x 5. (p. 730.)

Fie. 5. Lateral view of the peduncle, stomach and mouth of Amphogona apsteini. x 65. (p. 739.)
Fie. 6. Diphyes chamissonis, Huxley. x5. (p. 743.)

PLATE LV.

Fie. 1. Pseudoclytia gardinert sp. n. Male. Oral view. x 40. (p. 731.)
Fic. 2. Pseudoclytia gardineri sp. n. Female. Oral view. x 40. (p. 731.)

Fig. 3. Optical section of the group of bulbs on the margin of the umbrella of Pseudoclytia. x 55.
Fic. 4. Mesonema pensile (Modeer). x 1}. (p. 733.)
Fie. 5. Amphogona apsteini (Vanhiffen). Oral view. x 18. (p. 739.)

PLATE LVI.

Fic. 1. Amphogona apsteini (Vanhoffen). Lateral view. x21. (p. 739.)

xy
=
Q
Lo

Olindias singularis sp. n. Lateral view. x 5. (p. 737.)
Fie. 3. Solmundella bitentaculata (Quoy et Gaimard), x 15. (p. 741.)
Fics. 4—12. Aequorea maldivensis sp. n. (p. 732.)
Fic. 4. The bulbs on the margin of the umbrella. Outer view. x 8.
Fic. 5. A portion of the margin of the mouth showing the lips. x 31.

Fic. 6. A portion of the sub-umbrella and stomach, oral view, showing the oral lips, the
lower wall of the stomach, the gonads (male), and the marginal organs. x 3.

Fic. 7. Radial canals and the gonads (female). x 3.

Fic. 8. The oral lips. Outer view. x 10.

Fic. 9. The oral lips. Inner view. x 10.

Fic. 10. A tentacle, showing the outer view of the basal bulb. x 10.
Fic. 11.- A tentacle, showing the inner view of the basal bulb. x 10.

Fie. 12. A tentacle, showing the lateral view of the basal bulb. x 10. -

PLATE LVII.

Fie. 1. The tentacles of Olindias singuluris, the marginal bulbs, and sense organs. Outer view.
Fies. 2—9. Mesonema pensile (Modeer). (p. 733.)
Fie, 2. Diagram showing a transverse section of the umbrella. Nat. size.

Fic. 3. A portion of the sub-umbrella and stomach, oral view, showing the oral lips, the
lower rudimentary wall of the stomach, the gonads (male), and the marginal organs. x 3.

7

Fauna and Geography Maldives and Laccadives. Plate LIV,

B.T. B: del. : 8. Wilson, Cambridge.

BROWNE -MEDUSAE.

£.T.B.del. E. Wilson, Cambridge.

: BROWNE -MEDUSAE.

> Cambridge

Wilson

AE.

yy ryrerrress
%

ar

parser
meyer rrr eEETTSET ISS

Ae rerrryyyss

uw
=)
(=
Ea
=
i}
ria]
ea
=
—
()
(a2)
jen]

Or-----=

<

ridg

;famb

<
i)
g
il
f)

DORI ER ARTS SECS Me Ss

HYDROMEDUSAE,
Fic. 4. Radial canals and the gonads (female). x 5,
Fie. 5. The bulbs on the margin of the umbrella. Outer view.
Fic. 6. A tentacle showing the inner view of the basal bulb.
Fie. 7. A tentacle showing the outer view of the basal bulb.
Fic. 8. A tentacle showing the lateral view of the basal bulb.
Fic. 9. The oral lips. Outer view. x 10.

Fics. 10—15. <Amphogona apsteini. (p. 739.)

Fic. 10, A tentacle of Amphogona apsteini. Outer view.

Fic. 11. The external view of the spermary.
Fic. 12. A section of the spermary.

Fic. 13. The external view of the ovary.
Fic. 14. A section of the ovary.

Fic. 15. A sense organ, optical section. x 300.

Fic. 16. Basal bulb of a tentacle of Phialidiwm tenue. Outer view.

x 25.
x 10.
x 10.
<0!

x 65.

96—2

749

MARINE CRUSTACEANS.

XIII. THE HIPPIDEA, THALASSINIDEA AND SCYLLARIDEA.

By L. A. Borrapatue, M.A., Lecturer in Natural Sciences
at Selwyn College, Cambridge.

(With Plate LVIIZ.)

FOURTEEN species belonging to various groups of reptant decapods are enumerated in the
following lists. Two of them are new. All the rest have already been recorded from the
Indopacific region, with the exception of a species of Callianassa which I am unable to dis-
tinguish from a Martinique form.

Suborder ANoMURA. Tribe HIppIpEa.

The members of this group are all shallow water forms which live buried in the sand,
They are particularly plentiful at the very edge of the water on beaches of loose sand,
retreating with the outgoing tide and burrowing with extraordinary rapidity by means of their
flat legs with sickle-shaped ends. Garstang has described’ the way in which the antennules
of Albunea are adapted to this habitat, forming a filter to keep the sand out of the breathing
stream. In the case of most species of Remipes a sort of chamber is formed by the long
hairs on the short antennae and inner flagella of the antennules*. The animal lies in the
sand with the eyes just showing and this chamber at the surface to filter the water. It may
easily be caught by a bait of crab at the end of a line, pouncing on it with its sharp
maxillipeds and allowing itself to be flicked out of the sand if the rod be sharply lifted.

Quite a number of the peculiarities of other sand Decapoda are repeated independently
in the Hippidea. The so-called subchelate hands of Albunea are found, as we have seen
(p. 683), in various Oxystomes and Parthenopidae and in Kraussia, and the flattened legs of
all Hippidea in Ranina, Matuta and Kraussia. The overlapping carapace of Remipes is also
common among Oxystomes and Parthenopidae. The outward channel from the gill-chamber is
carried, in Hippidea as in Oxystomata, by the endopodite of the first maxilliped. The anten-
nules of Albunea are analogous to the antennae of the Corystidae. And the smooth surface

1 Q.J. M.S. xu. p. 224. Lregret the accidental omission Mr Garstang were confirmed.
of a reference to this paper from the article on the Oxysto- 2 This is not conspicuous in the species figured below.
mata, in the course of which some interesting suggestions of

MARINE CRUSTACEANS, 751

of the back of most Hippidea, marked with fine transverse ridges, is repeated in Kraussia
and, more coarsely, in some species of Calappa. It is such striking and quite independently
evolved likenesses as these which lend strength to the view that the resemblances between
Hippidea and Oxystomes are due to convergence only, and not genetic.

Family Albuneidae’. Genus Albunea Fabr., 1798.

1. Albunea microps Miers, 1879. J. Linn. Soc. xu. p. 328.
Dredged in Mahlosmadulu Atoll in 20 fathoms of water.

2. ?Albunea speciosa Dana, 1852. U.S. Hupl. Expd. Crust. 1. p. 405.

The telson in my specimen is more oval than in Dana’s figure, and is pointed. This,
however, may be only a sexual difference (Dana does not state the sex of his specimens;
mine is a male) or the species may be variable or varietal in this respect. Dana refers to
and figures the eye-scales as one triangular plate between the eyes.

The Blepharipoda fauriana of Bouvier (Ann. Soc. Ent. France, 1898) seems to be allied
to this species. Probably the genera Albunea and Blepharipoda meet near here.

Taken at Hulule, Male Atoll.

Family Hippidae. Genus Remipes Latr., 1806.

3. Remipes testudinarius Latr., 1806. De Man, Zool. Jahrb. vi. Syst. p. 476.
Taken at Hulule, Male Atoll, between tide-marks.

4. Remipes pacificus Dana, 1852. De Man, loc. cit.

Taken between tide-marks in Male and Minikoi Atolls, and dredged in Hulule Velu and
Mahlosmadulu Atoll in 7 and 6 fathoms respectively.

5. Remipes granulatus n, sp. (Pl. LVIII. fig. 1.)

Definition: “A Remipes with the carapace finely granular all over and raised into little
irregular lumps; the front notched but without a middle tooth in the notch; the outer teeth
of the fore edge not quite so long as those of the front and passing evenly into the side
edge of the carapace without an angle; the post-frontal groove fairly distinct, behind this a
low irregular hollow on each side of the middle lme, about a third of the length of the
carapace from its fore edge, and behind these again two half-moon shaped cracks in the same
position; about 35 pits along each side of the carapace; the eyestalks short; the ‘flagellum’
of the 2nd antenna of one joint only; the end-joint of the first leg as long as the propodite,
slightly compressed, smooth on the inside, tufted with hairs here and there on the outside,
fringed above, below, and at the end; and the last joimt in the 2nd and 8rd legs short, broad,
bent at an obtuse angle.”

z Key to the families of the Hippidea. Il. First pair of legs simple. Carapace subcylindrical, with
wings which cover the legs. 3rd maxilliped broad,

I, First pair of legs subchelate. Carapace flattened, without
without exopodite. Hippidae.

wings to cover the legs. 3rd maxilliped narrow, with
exopodite. Albuneidae.

“I
or
bo

L, A. BORRADAILE.

Length of single specimen: 9 mm. Colour in spirit: dead white. Differs from all other
species in the granular surface of the back.

One female, taken between tide-marks at Hulule, Male Atoll.

Tribe THALASSINIDEA.

With the exception of a few Axiidae’ which hide in weed, and such species as Callia-
nassa lignicola, taken from the hollow of a submerged twig, all the members of this tribe are
either burrowers, making galleries, which are often long and deep, in sandy or muddy bottoms,
or at least live in burrows made by other animals. Those which burrow between tide-marks
usually retire to the bottom of their holes when the tide is out, but they can sometimes
be seen just within the opening, when it is almost covered by the water. At such times
some at least of them may often be made to seize a bait but are very wary and hard to catch.
In spite of certain primitive characters which really remove them from the Nephropsidea, they
are at first sight very lobster-like in habit of body, but the abdomen, which is usually softened,
the compressed carapace and last pair or more of legs carried close against the sides, and
the reduced eyes are easily seen to be consequences of their peculiar mode of life.

Family Axiidae. Genus Asiopsis Borradaile, 1903.
For a definition of this genus see Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) xu. p. 538.

1. Aiopsis affinis (de Man), 1887. Arch. Nuturges. Lit. 1. p. 469.

A specimen was taken between tide-marks at Hulule, Male Atoll. It was of a purple
colour and lived in a purple weed.

Family Callianassidae. Subfamily Gebiinae.

Genus Upogebia Leach, 1814.
2. Upogebia sp.
A damaged specimen of a Upogebia allied to U. major (de Haan), but differing from it
in having no row of small teeth on the outside of the hand, was dredged in Mulaku Atoll
in 30 fathoms of water.

Subfamily Callianassinae. Genus Callianidea H. M.-Edw., 1837.
3. Callianidea typa H. M.-Edw., 1837. H. Nat. Crust. u. p. 320.
Taken between tide-marks at Goidu, Goifurfehendu Atoll.

Genus Callianassa Leach, 1814.

4. ?Callianassa (Callichirus) longiventris A. M.-Edw., 1870. (Pl. LVIII. fig. 2.) Nowv.
Arch. Mus. vi. p. 92.

1 For a key to the families, ete. of the Thalassinidea see Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (7) xu. p. 549.

MARINE CRUSTACEANS. 753

This species is recorded by Milne-Edwards from Martinique, but I am unable to find any
difference between our Maldive specimen and his description. Milne-Edwards gives no figure,
but a comparison will be made more easy by that in the accompanying plate.

Taken between tide-marks at Goidu, Goifurfehendu Atoll.

5. Callianassa (Callichirus) novae-britanniae Borradaile, 1900. Willey’s Zool. Results
Iv. p. 419.

The specimen is small and the carapace very soft, so that the lines on it are not
easily seen. Fig. 125, on p. 691 above, is from the New Britain specimen, and shows well
the two longitudinal lnes—linea thalassinica and linea anomurica—which, by a very rare
exception, are here found together.

Taken between tide-marks at Goidu, Goifurfehendu Atoll.
6. Callianassa (Trypaea) maldiwensis n. sp. (Pl. LVIII, fig. 3.)

Definition: “A Callianassa with the eyestalks short, flattened, pointed, with the cornea
on the outside; the rostrum sharp, reaching to the end of the cornea; no antennal tooth
on the carapace; the segments of the abdomen about equal, but the first rather shorter,
and the second rather longer than the rest; the third joint of the antennular stalk longer
than the others, as long as the flagella; the third maxillipeds with the ischiopodite and
meropodite broad, but the last three joints narrow; the palm of the great chela as broad
as, and about twice as long as, the wrist, both wrist and palm sharp-edged above and below,
scantily hairy except on the fingers, the lower edge of the palm saw-like within at the base,
that of the ischiopodite and meropodite with strong curved teeth; the telson as long as
the sixth abdominal limb.”

Length of the single specimen: 19 mm. Colour in spirit: white.
Taken between tide-marks at Hulule, Male Atoll.

Suborder Macrura. Tribe ScYLLARIDEA.

The members of this group are for the most part large and have heavy, well-armoured
bodies which are generally somewhat flattened, at least in the abdomen, and almost, or
quite, unprovided with a rostrum. They are distinguished from nearly all other Decapoda
by having none of their legs chelate, except sometimes the last pair, but they are not on this
account defenceless, for the abdominal segments usually carry at each side a sharp point,
and the abdomen thus becomes a powerful weapon which can be used with great effect.
They mostly live in water which is at least several fathoms deep, but the rock-lobsters
may be taken between tide-marks at night in the tropics, and small specimens are found
in the same place in daylight. Of the two families?, the Scyllaridae or bear crabs are found
on sandy bottoms, where they probably use as shovels the broad, flat plates which represent
their antennae, but the Palinuridae, or rock-lobsters, like rocky ground, often living on the
outer slopes of coral reefs, but never in the lagoons. The antennae of this family have
very long, stout, stiff flagella, and generally a special roughened surface on the first free

2 Key to the families of the Scyllaridea. II. Carapace flat. Eyes in complete orbits. Flagellum of

I. Carapace cylindrieal. Kyes in incomplete orbits. An- antenna represented by a flat plate. Scyllaridae.
tennae with long, stiff flagella. Palinuridae.

794 L. A. BORRADAILE.

jomt, with which they can make a sound by rubbing it against the head. It would be
interesting to know the use of this noise.

Family Palinuridae. Genus Panulirus White, 1847.

1. Panulirus penicillatus (Oliv.), 1791. Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb. vi. Syst. p. 28.

Dried shells found on the outer beach at Minikoi. These dried shells of rock-lobsters
are strangely more common on the beach than those of other Decapoda. Whether this be
due, as the natives say, to the creatures coming up to the surface to shed them, or to
their getting killed on the reef in some way, 1s hard to say, but I have never seen one with
the soft parts inside.

2. Panulirus polyphagus (Hbst.), 1793. Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb. x. Syst. p. 266.

My specimens have no white band across the abdominal segments, and the white markings
on the legs are in stripes running lengthwise, but broken and somewhat wandering. This
form would seem to be the one to which Fabricius gave the name of ornatus (Ent. Syst.
Suppl., p. 400, 1798).

One dried shell from the beach and one very small individual taken alive on the reef
at Minikoi. Common in the Maldives.

Family Scyllaridae. Genus Scyllarus Fabr., 1793.

3. Scyllarus martensi (Pfeffer), 1881. (Pl. LVIII. fig. 4.) Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb, vi. Syst.
p. 44.

The four or five teeth on the inner edge of the second joint of the antenna in this
species are each more or less deeply cleft into two in most of my specimens, so as te
give a saw-like edge with twice the number of teeth.

Dredged in Mulaku, Kolumadulu, Mahlosmadulu, and South Nilandu, in depths of 20—40

fathoms, always on a bottom of sand or mud.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LVIII.

Fic. 1. Remipes granulatus n. sp. a. from above, b. from beneath.

Fic. 2. ?Callianassa longiventris A. M.-Edw. «. whole animal from above, b. outside of greater
hand, The lash of the antenna and the fourth leg on each side are lost.

Fig. 3. Callianassa maldivensis n. sp. @. whole animal from above, b. outside of greater hand.
The lash of the antenna and the last leg on each side are lost.

Fic. 4. Scyllarus martensi Pfeffer, var. a. whole animal from above, 0. first leg, ¢. third leg,
d. antennule, folded up, ¢. one of the scales on the back greatly enlarged.

Fauna and Geography, Maldives and Laccadives Plate LVIII

i)
a

« S
in
Wi

Yj A f AUK NS
“py Cr TAN GE

ils

BORRADAILE——MACRURA AND ANOMURA,

MADREPORARTA.
PARTS I. AND IL.

By J. Srantey Garviner, M.A., Fellow of Gonville and Caius College, and
Demonstrator in Animal Morphology in the University of Cambridge.

(With Plates LIX.—LXIV.)

JT. INTRODUCTION WITH NOTES ON VARIATION.

THE present collection contains over 1,000 specimens of dried corals besides a large number
in spirit and formalin and a quantity of smaller pieces for comparative purposes. The reef
forms are mainly from the following localities: (a@) Minikoi, the most southern bank of the
Laccadive Group; (b) Goidu, the east island of Goifurfehendu atoll; and (c) Hulule, the most
- south-easternly island of N. Male atoll. An attempt was made to collect as thoroughly as
possible—particularly at Minikoi and Hulule—for the comparison of the localities with one
another, and specimens were not generally taken from reefs elsewhere. In addition, dredgings
yielded a considerable number of specimens, although few hauls were taken on the outer
slopes of the reefs.

The colours of the living colonies were noted at Minikoi, and both at Minikoi and Hulule
careful records were kept of the situations where the various species grew. In many cases
rough notes were added so as to show the actual positions in which the living corals stood,
both for comparison with the upheaved reets of the locality and so far as possible to ascertain
how far mode of growth is dependent on hght and environmental conditions. These observations
were of immediate value in my study of the coral reef question, and have been of great assistance
in working out the collection. I had intended to have given an account of the variability due
to these causes, but the limited interest of the subject and the cost of suitable illustrations
have reluctantly compelled me to forgo the task. I have under each species indicated as
briefly as possible the variation that is found in the several colonies due to these causes.

I divide the variation shown by corals into three classes: (a) that referred to above,
we. vegetative ; (b) continuous; and (c) discontinuous or specific. Of the latter the only instances
definitely known in corals, so far as I am aware, are those of Flabellum rubrum and stokesi
and of the two forms of Heterocyathus’. Below I have suggested certain additional
variations as belonging to this class, such as that shown by the two varieties of Acanthastraea
hirsuta, lobed and massive forms of Hydnophora microcona, and three similar species of

1 Vide Marine Investigations in S, Africa, 1902, p. 211 et seq. and 1904 in the Press; also Proc. Camb, Phil, Soc.,
vol. x1. p. 463, 1902.

Guar 97

756 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

Echinopora. I am aware that they are very doubtful, at least 500 or 1000 specimens
being required to establish any case, but I am of opinion that the phenomenon is much
commoner in corals than has been previously supposed.

A species in one locality may show definite discontinuous variations in one or more
characters, but it by no means follows that the same discontinuous variations will be shown
by the same species in a different locality. The specimens may, indeed, show none of the
same discontinuous variations, though others may be clearly indicated. It is not improbable
that a large collection of one and the same species from many localities would appear to vary
in a perfectly continuous manner, and thus all idea of its true variability would be lost.
Work on a collection from a single locality is best calculated to bring out the phenomenon,
but one requires a collection from some other locality for comparison. This I have to some
extent had in my Rotuma and Funafuti collections, but unfortunately they are not nearly
large enough for the purpose.

Mr Bernard’s method of cataloguing the corals of the British Museum (Vol. Iv.) appears
to me to be well calculated to throw light on discontinuous variability, but we require a still
further development of his system of tables, comparisons of two, three, or as many characters
as possible, those particularly that are capable of being expressed in numerical terms}.
Mr Bernard was in my opinion unfortunate in starting on Goniopora, though he has got
results of great value, because there are relatively few specimens of the genus in the Museum.
The fact that Mr Bernard is able to place the specimens of each single locality under so
many forms, whereas the species are in his present collections impossible to determine, points
to the probability of discontinuous variability being, as I have above inferred, from my own
collections. Later on, no doubt the species will be determinable with their various discontinuous
variations. It will then be possible to see how far the environment and the physical conditions
of the localities have affected the parent corallites to cause them to vary their gametes. For
this purpose sedentary organisms and particularly corals are peculiarly favourable, because they
can, so far as we are aware, in no way make choice of their environment, and must all be
affected in any region by the same physical conditions. Larvae of neighbouring localities,
such as Ceylon and the Maldives, would certainly be interchanged to some extent, but the
immensely greater number of coral colonies in a locality would presumably be produced from
larvae of the same locality. Yet, unless there is a real action of the environment in each
region in producing its peculiar discontinuous variations in the gametes of the new immigrants
it will be obvious that the species must remain approximately constant.

The second class of variation referred to is the continuous. That it exists in a very definite
form is shown in some species below, but it is exceedingly complex and almost impossible
to satisfactorily distinguish from the vegetative. The physical conditions of the Red Sea,
Maldives, and Rotuma differ very markedly, and if their action is of any great importance
in natural selection, we should not unnaturally expect to find considerable differences between
the corals of the three regions. Yet the opposite is the case—more especially between
the Red Sea and the Maldives, which are the most different—-very many species being
precisely the same, ze. showing no dissimilarities in their specific characters. Yet, there
does appear to be a real difference. The Red Sea specimens of Astraeidae, considered in
their entirety, have larger corallites and calices, and are smoother with less exsert and less
toothed septa than the Maldivan, which in the same characters lie intermediate to those

1 Anyone working at the question could to a large extent do this for himself from Mr Bernard’s last catalogue.

MADREPORARIA. 757

from Rotuma and Funafuti, in each species however the specific characters being clearly
recognisable. Indeed, there would appear to be a locality mode for certain characters in
each genus, a fact which Mr Bernard’s catalogue of Goniopora certainly illustrates. The
characters, which thus vary, may be all to some extent vegetative, but can they be entirely so ?
They do not, so far as my study has gone, seem to include the characters on which the
species in any genus are founded, whereas discontinuous variation chiefly affects these
characters. The differences in the specimens between the different localities referred to are
small, but, if they be due to natural selection, the logical result of its action would be to
produce ultimately fresh genera with parallel species. There is no sign of any such action
goimg on at the present time. Coral genera are extremely widely spread, and the same species
are found in widely separated regions. If, as seems probable, such species are not found
in intermediate regions, this fact would point to their presence in these distant regions as
due either to the fixation of such a number of discontinuous variations as form their specific
characters, in a word to the parallel formation of discontinuous variations, or on the other
hand, to the particular species having once extended over the whole area and been killed
out or altered in the intermediate areas. The difficulties im respect to the last view are
obvious, when one considers the W. and EK. Indies, or the Red Sea or Maldives and the
Philippines, but it is useless discussing the matter further until we have definite accounts
of considerable collections of several genera from different localities.

With regard to the species question in corals I can only say that I have not found the
same difficulty with the Astraeidae that Mr Bernard has certainly experienced in the perforate
genera. The species seem definitely separated and constituted, and I feel reasonably certain
that I am dealing with definite species or varieties. Before attempting to name, I sorted
each genus into its species, a task in which I was much assisted by my notes above referred to,
placing under each specimen a paper with measurements and notes of all such characters
as seemed to me to be specific in its genus. I then proceeded in the usual way, but I have
been much aided by criticism from Prof. Jeffrey Bell and Mr Bernard, and the kindness of
these gentlemen in assisting me on many occasions in examining the British Museum collections.
The difficulties of the work can only be appreciated by those who have examined sedentary
organisms. Many of the so-called species are described on extreme vegetative varieties, or
on single small specimens from unknown localities, very commonly without figures, while in
many descriptions all reference to half or more of the specific characters is omitted.
Considering the dates of their publication, I can only pay a high tribute to Milne-Edwards
and Haime’s great work, Histoire des Coralliaires, and Klunzinger’s Die Korallthiere des
Rothen Meeres, in referring to each of which I have merely mentioned the page and figures
under their authors’ names. I have also adopted the same course in reference to Dana’s
Zoophytes and my paper on my Pacific Ocean Astraeidae (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1899, p. 734).
References to other literature will be found in the above works; I have in the majority of
cases not given other references unless they throw some definite light, that the above do not,
on the species under consideration. I am particularly indebted to Klunzinger’s interpretation
and photo-figures of Ehrenberg’s specimens. It is to be hoped that the same may be done for
Duchaissaing and Michelotti, and also that Prof. Verrill will figure the species that he has
described. However, I am not much affected by the work of these authors, since the
American species, on which they principally worked, are taken altogether widely different
from the Maldivan.

97—2

758 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

Il. ASTRAEIDAE.

The specimens of this family number about 400; many are small fragments, or from
the same colony, or young colonies, so that only about half are enumerated as being of
use for comparative purposes. They are divided into 69 species of 21 genera. The number
of the latter is remarkable as compared with the 12 genera obtained by me in the Pacific
and the 16 genera (omitting synonyms) described by Klunzinger from the Red Sea. Definite
comparisons and general observations on the family I defer until the whole collection has
been worked out.

I have with certain exceptions arranged the genera according to Duncan’s classification
(Linn. Soc. Journ., vol. XVUL pp. 1—204), which is in need of thorough revision. Where no
references to the genera are given, they are implied to this work. As defined by Duncan
I use the term corallite as an individual member of a colony, calice as the upper opening
of the corallite within the theca (or epitheca if it extends to the opening), and colwmella
as the structure which fills up the axis of the corallite or calice. When a definite structure
is laid down covering the outermost sides of a colony or a simple coral, it is termed
epitheca; it has everywhere a morphological character in that it is deposited from one side
only, ze. the inner, no part of the living tissues extending outside it. The wall is the
structure which separates a calice from the exterior, or two calices from each other. The
depth of the calice is the vertical distance between the top of the theca and that of the
columella. Dissepiments are of two kinds, exothecal and endothecal, outside and within the
theca.

I. Genus Antillia.
1. Antillia constricta Briig., var. maldivensis nov, (Pl. LIX. figs. 4 and 5.)
Briiggemann, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. Xx. p. 309 (1877).

The species has a columella formed of trabeculae flattened parallel to the long axis of
the corallum, while var. maldivensis has a spongy columella with a rather papillose
surface.

My three specimens measure (1) 75 mm. long, 43 mm. broad, narrowest 19 mm., and
57 mm. high, (2) 74x 48, narrowest 18, and 52 mm. high, the corallum rather bent at the
base, and (3) 69 x 42, narrowest 18, and 37 mm. high. The epitheca varies from 6 to 25 mm.
from the edge of the cup. The smallest specimen closely agrees with the type in its shape
and septal arrangements. In neither of the others is there any marked elevation of the
walls on either side of the central constriction, and (2) is rather irregular at one end as
if a second constriction was commencing to form. Septal cycles I—IV join the columella,
and in the larger specimens the paliform lobes of III often approach in size and appearance
those of the first two cycles. The specimens are 20, 20, and 15 mm. deep from top of theca
to top of columella; the septa are 2°5—3 mm. exsert.

Locality. Suvadiva, 31 7,
II. Genus Cylicia.
2. Cylicia ?stellata Dana. Dana, p. 377, xxvill. 5.

I have not seen suticient specimens of the genus—the British Museum has Ed. and
H.’s type of C. excavata=C. tenella, but it has never been properly cleaned, and I can

MADREPORARIA, 759

find few other species—to venture on any determination of the species. The corallites of my
specimens are extremely variable, but most show the star of the above species formed by the
six primaries. The genus appears to me to be a very doubtful member of the Astraeidae,
and would probably repay morphological investigation (both corallum and polyps).

Locality. Common under overhanging coral or rock masses of the boulder zone, reef-
flat and lagoon reefs throughout the Maldives (not Minikoi). The corallites are only found
in comparative darkness, and appear to shun the light. Polyps colourless.

III. Genus Vridacophyllia.

3. Tridacophyllia lactuca (Pallas). Dana, p. 195, 1x. 10.

A single specimen from S. Nilandu, 307, and a smaller piece, Felidu, 20 f., seem to
belong to this species as understood by Dana. The surface of the first is so distorted by
worms and capsules of Pyrgoma, standing up for 1—2cm., that identification is extremely
difficult.

IV. Genus Luphyllia.

4. Euphyllia glabrescens (Chamisso). Ed. and H., u. p. 192 and Gard., p-. 735.

The specimens differ from the Rotuma ones in that the septa very seldom rise above
the wall. Fission takes place by a pinching in and fusion of the two opposite walls of an
elongated corallite. The calices are often much distorted by the round tubular dwellings of
Pyrgoma.

Locality. The colonies of this species may generally be found in hollows towards the
inner side of the reef-flat or in protected situations, where there is no sand or mud, both
at Minikoi and throughout the Maldive group. Where it occurs, as to the S. of Hulule, it
is exceedingly abundant, but is nowhere a reef-builder. Colour, dull green.

5. Euphyllha turgida (Dana). Dana, p. 167, and Ed. and H., 1. p. 193 (and Ann.
des Sc. Nat., t. x. pl. 6, fig. 1, 1848).

Three branched specimens with calices varying up to 4 cm. long by 2 cm. broad, closely
agree with Ed. and H.’s description and figure, especially the section. The septa are
scarcely exsert, and the corallites have a tendency to be constricted round their open ends.

Locality. North Male, 28 f, and S. Nilandu, 36 /f.

V. ?Genus Mycetophyllia, Ed. and H.

6. A small specimen with five calicular centres may belong to this genus. It presents
a striking resemblance to Ed. and H.’s figure of M. lamarckana (Ann. des Sc. Nat., t. x.
pl. 8, fig. 6a), and does not agree with the young specimens of Mussa that I have seen.

Locality. Suvadiva, 40 f, bottom covered with coarse rubble.

760 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

VI. Genus Mussa.

7. Mussa corymbosa (Forsk.).

Mussa corymbosa and cactus, Dana, pp. 177—8, vu. 1. M. corymbosa, Ed. and H.,
p. 333, and Kiz., p. 6, 1. 4 and 9. M. cactus, Gard., p. 737.

Locality. Sparingly on lagoon reefs and in holes of the reef-flat in the Maldives (six
specimens). Colour, a brown padded edge, surrounding a green peristomial valley.

VII. Genus Symphyllia.

8. Symphyllia sinuosa (Q. and G.). (Pl. LIX. figs. 1, 2 and 3.)

Meandrina sinuosa, Quoy and Gaimard, Voy. de lAstr., Zooph. p. 227, Pl. XVIIL
figs. 4 and 5 (1833); Symphyllia sinuosa, Ed. and H., 1. p. 370, and Gard., p. 738.

I refer seven specimens to this species, and I have two further specimens from Rotuma
and the Singapore region before me. They show clearly that the genus is formed by the
fusion together of series such as are found in Mussa. The species is simply a massive Mussa
closely related to M. corymbosa.

Internal structure. The dividing wall of the series in all the specimens possesses a
distinct furrow or groove. In parts of some of the colonies it is a valley in the upper edge
of the wall, but over the greater part of their surfaces is merely a narrow deep notch between
the outer edges of the septal plates (septa + costae), which are only secondarily continuous
between the calicular rows. This can be clearly seen from the surface owing to the fact that
the septa of neighbouring rows are seldom exactly opposite to one another, and that the
thicker septa rather tend to alternate than lie opposite. In section it is clear that the septa
are not continuous, and in places one can distinguish between their outer edges a thin, ver-
tically rising plate. The latter is much fenestrated, and is incomplete; it may be a secondary
formation, but appears to be continuous right down to the epitheca of the colony, and in
my view represents the remains of the fused epitheca of neighbouring rows. The exothecal
dissepiments are 15—8 mm. apart in accordance with the thickness of the wall; they are
not continuous between the theca of neighbouring rows, but are arched, convex side upper-
most, from the theca to the centre of the wall, ze. to the fused epithecal line above mentioned.
The morphology appears to be the same in all the specimens, but there is great variation in
the thickness of the walls (25—8 mm.), and in the thinner their structure may be almost
obliterated so that they appear relatively solid. The endothecal dissepiments are lightly arched
from the theca to the columella; they are thin and often form large vesicles about 2 mm.
broad by 5—10 mm. long. The septa may be almost complete or much fenestrated, near their
edges passing into flattened, upstanding plates, the innermost and smallest of which form the
columella.

Variation. The specimens in their internal structure show little variation except what
is dependent on the thickness of the walls and the distinctness of the furrows, both already
referred to. There are two classes of septa, (a) coarse, upstanding, 3—5 mm. exsert, 1—2 mm.
thick over the theca, with 1—3 great pointed teeth near their upper edges, passing internally
into blunter lobes or relatively fine teeth, and (6) fine, not more than 2 mm. exsert nor
1 mm. thick, closely set internally with fine pointed teeth. In the Rotuma specimen there

MADREPORARIA. 761

is less difference in the two classes than in any of the present collection, though all the
characters of the latter vary considerably in different parts of the colonies. The two classes
of septa may alternate with one another in any series, or the larger septa may be separated
by an average, in parts even of the same colonies, of 2, 3 up to 8 smaller septa. On opposite
sides of the walls the septa may lie against one another but more frequently alternate to
some degree; the larger septa throughout are much more frequently arranged contiguous to
the smaller, but there is every variation. The septa range from 6—10 in 1 em.; the series
are 15—3 cm. wide by 1—2 cm. deep. The longitudinal septa joining calicular centres range
from 1—5 in number.

The specimens undoubtedly belong to Symphyllia sinuosa, of which 8S. grandis appears
to me to be only a vigorously growing form, though Ed. and H.’s figure is peculiar. The
descriptions (no figures) of S. agaricia, radians, and valenciennesi are not sufficient to
separate them, though they may be really different species. The same remark applies to
S. subtilis, Rehberg (Abth. Nat. Ver., Hamburg, Bd xu. p. 16, Pl. I. fig. 6, 1892).

Locality. The species is fairly common on the lagoon shoals and reefs of the Maldives.
I have also seen it in the outer slope, and it is not improbably in places an important reef-
builder. The specimens come from Hulule, Goidu and Minikoi. Colour of the Minikoi
specimen (fig. 4), a large mass several feet in diameter, in central upper part of the colony,
over walls transparent, peristome very light green dotted with dark green, edge of stomodoeum
white, and at sides, over walls very dark green, peristome white slate, edge of stomodoeum

white,

VIII. Genus Coeloria.

Ed. and H., 11. p. 411; Klz., p. 15, and Gard., p. 740. Ulophyllia, Ed. and H., 11 p. 377;
and Quelch, Report on the Reef Corals of H.M.S. Challenger, p. 88 (1886).

I still consider that Coeloria and Maeandrina are quite separate genera, the latter
having, so far as we know, a true columella, and the former merely trabeculae extending out
from the septa to fill up the axial fossa. The species appear to me to fall into three types,
which may be best indicated by C. pachychila, daedalea, and magna, C. cooperi shows a
transition to the last, which would formerly have been placed in the genus Ulophyllia. The
regular method of division of the series, or of the circumscribing of the calices in the genus,
is by the enlargement and fusion of septa from their two walls or ridges. The septa on either
side in their further growth bend away from the new walls, thus removing to some distance
the columellar trabeculae, to which the septa give rise. Later, the new walls themselves get
septa, and form the end walls of series or the circumscribing walls of calices. The first part
of this process takes place very early in Ulophyllia, but it is no different to what occurs
in Coeloria, and the gap between the species of the two genera—if there was any before—
is bridged by C. cooperi and magna as well as the Challenger species. Ulophyllia is
undoubtedly, so far as its recent species are concerned, a synonym of Coeloria.

Distribution. The genus is the most abundant of all Astraeids on the reef-flat and
outside the edge of the reef to 5 f, where the immediate force of the breakers is felt. It also
occurs abundantly on the outer slope down to 15 f. and one specimen comes from 28 f. It
may be found occasionally on the sand flat behind the boulder zone, but it evidently loves
neither this position nor shoals in enclosed lagoons. Colour, generally some shade of green.

762 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

9, Coeloria pachychila (Ehrb.). WebA 7Os 1i53, is (0

A single half ball-shaped specimen agrees with this species in every respect. The width
of the valleys from the tops of the ridges is generally about 7 mm., and depth 5 mm.

Locality. Maldives, brought to me by a native who stated that he obtained it from the
Male reef-flat.

10. Coeloria sinensis (Ed. and H.).
Ed. and H., 1. p. 416, and Gard., p. 742, xiv. 3. Coeloria edwardsi, Gard., p. 744, XLVI. 6.

I refer fourteen specimens with some doubt to this species, the mode of which les much
nearer C, edwardsi. The species shows almost as much variation as C. arabica, Klz., but
it differs from it in its regularly smaller sized (breadth and depth) calicular rows, which
show no tendency to vary in their mode so as to approach C. arabica.

In their characters the specimens vary between the two above-cited species, most rather
approaching towards C. edwardsi. The series are generally long and increase by their out-
pushing at the edges of the colony over its basis of support; subsequently they are divided
up by transverse partitions, but, where growth is not luxuriant, this may be compared
almost to a process of budding from the ends of the series. Their breadth varies from
3—6 mm., average across parallel valleys 3—4 mm., sinuous valleys 42 mm., where growth
unfavourable larger but never more than 5mm. The theca is quite perfect, ‘5—1 mm. thick
varying up to 2 mm. owing to deposition of endotheca. Septa, 11—16 in 1 ecm. (average
of 55 being 13:5), 8-—13 reaching columella (average 10:4), ‘5 mm. exsert, continuous over
walls, square above rather than pointed, finely toothed, precipitous slope to the bottom of
the valleys. Columella seldom more than 3 mm. below upper edges of theca, at first fused
thickenings of septal sides, often at this stage ending in spines flattened parallel to the
direction of the valley, and varying with its depth. When a valley is very shallow, owing
to boring organisms underneath or other causes, the columella may approach in appearance
the condition in Leptoria, though generally it is quite inconspicuous. When growth is slow
and the valleys are broad, the line of fusion of the septal edges may be joined by additional
processes from the septal sides, so that the columella may appear to consist of a relatively
broad line of trabecular substance. The endothecal dissepiments number 15—18 in 1 em., but
vary in individual specimens.

Locality. Common over the reef-flats of Minikoi and the Maldives; found also on the
outer slopes and occasionally on the lagoon shoals.

11. Coeloria daedalea, Ell. and Sol. Gard., p. 741, xLv1. 1 and 2.

Three specimens from Hulule, W. reef and passage through same,

12. Coeloria astraeiformis, Ed. and H. Gard., p. 743, XLVI. 4.

Two specimens from Minikoi, reef-flat and lagoon to the south. This species is possibly
only a facies of the last.

13. Coeloria cooperi, n. sp. (Pl LX. fig. 9.)

Colony massive, with distinct costae but no epitheca showing at the edge. Series of
moderate length (longest 6 cm.) and twisted, average breadth about 11 mm., 4—9 mm. deep
(average 6 mm.), calices rarely circumscribed. Walls solid, thin and pointed, often at upper
ends a little fenestrated, apparently formed by thickenings of the septal sides. Septa, thin,

MADREPORARIA. 763

continuous over ridges, 1—2 mm. exsert, upper ends more or less horizontal up to 5 mm.
broad, subequal, about 1 mm. apart, sometimes more crowded, sides granulated; teeth very
irregular, often small above, near the bottom of the valley passing imto fine pointed teeth
or into blunt upstanding lobes, the latter from opposite ridges often fusing and forming the
first stages of the division into separate calices. Colwmella varying greatly in amount in
the valleys, being cut up where opposite septa fuse, either formed of the mnermost pointed
teeth or of rounded trabeculae from most of the septa, always very loose and open. In
section endothecal dissepiments thin, very oblique 1—2 mm. apart, often at edge or where
growth is unfavourable causing the walls to appear exceedingly thick, extending up to within
2mm. of the edges of the septa.

The colony is very peculiar in the frequent fusion of large septa across the bottom of
the series. The septa on either side of these may curve a little away from them thus giving
an appearance in some parts of the series of the calicinal centres being distinct.

Locality. A single specimen, the edge of a large flattened mass from the west reef
of Hulule, showing a much rounded living surface of 38 by 19 cm.

—

14. Coeloria magna, n. sp. (Pl. LX. figs. 7 and 8.)

Colony massive, underside, up to within 1 cm. of the edges, clothed with wavy epitheca,
at edge strongly costate. Series, short, longest 4 cm., average breadth about 15 mm., very
shallow, almost superficial or up to 7 mm. deep, calicular centres generally distinctly recog-
nisable. Walls thin at edge, in most parts appearing very bluntly pointed, and thick below
owing to the oblique character and superficial position of the top exothecal dissepiments.
Septa thin, continuous (in some parts very irregular—often thickened almost vesicular—owing
to boring animals or small cirripedes), irregularly exsert (about 1 mm.), generally pointed,
but with scattered septa flat-topped (3 mm.) up to 3 mm. high, about 40 round a circum-
scribed calice, from 6—10 in 1 em. in accordance with the presence or absence of minute
septa alternating with the larger, more crowded at edges of colony, sides granular; teeth
minute, towards the inner ends of the smaller septa more pointed and longer, merging into
blunt, often two or three toothed paliform lobes on 12—18 of the septa of circumscribed
calices; in the series septa occasionally joined across the valleys, dividing them up into fairly
distinct calicinal centres. Columella small, sometimes formed of the innermost pointed teeth
but more often of rounded, very lax trabeculae from at least half of the septa. Hndothecal
dissepiments oblique to 30°, thin, 15—2°5 mm. apart, rather vesicular.

The species, even more markedly than the last, shows the division of the valleys into
separate calices by the fusion of the larger septa from either side. It differs from Ed. & H.’s
species of Ulophyllia as described and figured. With the Challenger specimens, which seem
to me to be of one species, it has greater resemblances, but its shallow cells, breadth of
series, and septal characters serve to separate it, so far as our knowledge of variation at
present goes. Figs. 7 and 8 show two different parts of the colony.

Locality. Addu, outer slope, 28 f, a flattened massive colony, 41 em, long by 27 cm.
broad and 7 em. thick.

764 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

IX. Genus Leptoria.

15. Leptoria gracilis, Dana.
Dana, p. 261, xiv. 6; Ed. and H., p. 407; Kiz., p. 13, u. 5, rx. lla—d; Gard., p. 739.

Four specimens belong to this species. They differ from Dana’s description and my own
Rotuma specimen in being everywhere more delicate, septa less exsert and rough, and all
parts thinner. They show little variation, and that mainly due to the presence of boring
animals, all kinds of which appear to love their corallum; from this cause the fused theca
may appear thick, in section hollowed out, and the plates of the columella thick and pushed
up so as to reach the level of the top of the theca. The surface is studded with the round
holes of a crab, Cryptochirus, but barnacles do not occur.

Locality. Rather sparsely distributed, especially at Minikoi, mainly reef-flat and outer
slope, a specimen from a shoal near the W. passage of Minikoi, and specimens from Hulule
and Goidu. Colour, brown with green lines, where the peristome series occur.

X. Genus Hydnophora.

The several species of this genus show perhaps as much variation as those of any other
in the collection. I did not, however, study the variability of its colonies 7m situ, the genus
being rare at Minikoi, and I have no notes on the variation of the specimens in the British
Museum. Although I have more than 50 specimens before me I am quite unable to deter-
mine with any certainty out of all the species mentioned by Ed. and H. and Klunzinger,
more than H. microcona, H. maldivensis would appear to be a truly explanate form,
but I have explanate and massive: specimens of H. lobata below, which as also the lobed
forms in places approach H. microcona. There are, however, no intermediates, though all
as well as the specimens of H. microcona grew in more or less the same environment. This
fact then suggests that of H. microcona we have two real varieties, ie. explanata and
lobata.

Distribution. The genus is found on any reefs in the Maldives, and we observed it
forming considerable masses on the outer slope of Goifurfehendu Atoll. It may hence be
an important reef-builder. It varies in depth to 32, the deeper specimens very markedly
differing from all described reef-forms.

16. Hydnophora grandis, n. sp. (Plate LX. fig. 11.)

Colony massive and thick but exceedingly light, edges explanate but coarse, clothed
underneath by a thin epitheca. Monticules ending above in fine points or in thin plates,
in the colony not more than 6 mm. long, 2—3 mm. high, varying from 4 to 9 mm. wide from
valley to valley, average about 7mm. The septa on the monticules number from 6 to 18,
the most pointed 6 or 8, those most elongated 14—18, mode 10 or 12; they are not exsert,
shghtly granular at the sides, rough edged but not toothed, and appear more distinct than
in any other species owing to the lowness and breadth of the monticules; around calicular
centres the septa number 6 or less. There is no definite colwmella but the septa at the
bottom of the valleys bend towards the calicular centres, and may be thickened, while between
the lower ends sometimes rough pillars arise, especially where the septa round a centre
number less than six. Jn section the monticules are seen to have the very thin, narrow or

MADREPORARIA. 765

broad theca in the centre, from which the septa appear to radiate; the loculi are filled up
with vesicles or cells not more than ‘75 mm. apart and scarcely longer, extending to within
1mm. of the edges of the septa; the valleys are filled up in the same way but with rather
larger vesicles, so that there is obviously no columella.

The species differs from all others in its large monticules and few septa, as well as its
hght structure. The theca is very difficult to see in section; it is often a mere rod from
which the septa radiate as from a rod-like columella.

Locality. S. Nilandu, 25 f, and Haddumati, 32 f.

17. Hydnophora microcona, Lmk. Ed. and H., 11. 423, and Gard., p. 744.

There are nine specimens of this species in the collection. It is fairly common, though
rather local, throughout the Maldives, but scarce at Minikoi, where it was only obtained from
the reef-flat. The Maldive specimens were collected at Hulule, Goidu. Addu, and Turadu
(S. Mahlosmadulu) from reef-flat and lagoon. Colour, olive green, polyps noticeable for their
large amount of mucus.

18. Hydnophora ?lobata (Lmk.). Ed. and H., 1. p. 421.

Two moderate sized specimens, the largest 17 by 14cm. by 13 em. high, may belong to
this species. They are extraordinarily variable on their thin edges, lobes and valleys, in
parts appearing to represent a lobate variety of C. microcona, but I have seen no inter-
mediates.

Locality. Two specimens from the west reef of Hulule. [H. lobata mihi (p. 745) from
Rotuma is probably not the same species as the above specimens, though it resembles them
in its light texture. H. exesa mihi (p. 745) from Funafuti is probably a new species. ]

19. Hydnophora maldivensis, n. sp. (PI. LX. fig. 12.)

We dredged 27 pieces, all small, of an explanate coral of this genus, which I am bound
to refer to a new species. It comes close to H. gyrosa, Ed. and H., but the only indication
of lobing that it gives is in an elevation over two barnacles 15 mm. high by 12 mm. broad.
Even in its thickest part it is less than 10 mm., averaging in different parts 83—6 mm. Its
characters are as follows:

Colony, explanate, thin, covered underneath to within 1 cm. or so of the edge with a
delicate epitheca, through which the ridge-like, untoothed costae (14 in 1 em.) are clearly
visible. Monticules towards the centre of the colony more rounded and much larger, 2—3 mm.
high and 6—7 mm. between the valleys, passing gradually into long (6—7 cm. at edges),
slightly sinuous collines 1—2 mm. high and 4—5 mm. broad, separating series of calices, of
which the centres are not visible except near the centre of the colony, where they have
generally 6 septa; theca only visible in places as a thin line. Septa not exsert, near the
edges sloping up very obliquely on the walls of the series, subequal about 1 mm. apart but
sometimes alternating with very minute septa; teeth not noticeable near upper edges, within
very low, distant and blunt. Columella a few irregular, rough, twisted trabeculae from the
lower ends of the septa, varying considerably in amount, in some places forming a distinct
base to the valleys, but in others very irregularly massed, probably not a true columella,
In section extremely vesicular, the vesicles extending to within 1 mm. of the edges of the
septa and forming the monticules; theca not visible.

Locality. S. Nilandu, 24 f. and 30 f, Haddumati, 32 f, and Suvadiva, 25 f.
98—2

766 J. STANLEY GARDINER. |

XI. Genus Favia.

Ed. and H., 11. p. 426. Kiz., p. 25. Astraea, Gard., p. 747.

The genus is in many respects a most unsatisfactory one. On the one side it almost
merges into Coeloria (vide C. astraeiformis, Ed. and H.), and on the other into Gonias-
traea. Indeed, many species are in parts at any rate indistinguishable from the latter, save
in microscopical sections. Again, Orbicella approaches close to it in that some of its species
show fission moderately freely and some intracalicular gemmation (which may simulate fission)
as well as the more regular extracalicular. The presence of a valley or sulcus between the
corallites is really no test, and the septa are often continuous in Orbicella between the
calices and within the walls.

The species in the collection are most variable, even more so than those of Orbicella
and Prionastraea. Attention may be particularly drawn to F. denticulata, in 16 specimens
of which I have attempted to work out the variability, both normal and vegetative, and also
to F. hululensis. The species fall naturally into three groups: (a) those with rather
rounded calices, suleus on walls, theca distinct, paliform lobes more or less prominent, and
exsert portions of septa generally horizontal; (b) angular calices, thin walled and no sulcus,
marked paliform lobes, exsert parts of septa rounded or rough; and (c) gyrose calices. No. (a)
includes F. cavernosa, denticulata, hululensis and hombroni, a very close series, a gap
in size only between the last two, with offshoots in F. affinis and laccadivica. In (b) we
have F, halicora and parvimurata, which might almost be placed in Goniastraea, and in
(c) F. versipora and adduensis, the former particularly recalling certain Coeloria.

Distribution. The genus is essentially dominant over all other massive forms on lagoon
shoals in Minikoi and throughout the Maldives; it is also, with the possible exception of
Prionastraea, the most abundant in the waters of the outer slope to about 15 f. It is seldom
found on the reef-flat, and generally shuns all sandy spots, or where sediment may collect.
Its colomes on the lagoon shoals of Minikoi form enormous, overhanging masses, several feet
in thickness, often dead in the centre but living on the sides. Numerous boring organisms,
particularly Sipunculoids, find a home in its coralla, but seldom distort its surface. Only one
specimen was dredged, that of F. adduensis, from 25 7 Colour of the living colonies almost
invariably some shade of green.

20. Favia versipora (Ehrb.).

Favia ehrenbergi=F. versipora (Ehrb.), Klz., p. 29, m1. 5, 7 and 8, and 1x. 1 a and b.
Favia bertholleti, Ed. and H., p. 431.

A single specimen from the edge of the reef at Minikoi belongs to Klunzinger’s typical
form of this species. Its walls are, indeed, more rounded, septa thicker and less numerous
(18 to 26), and calices rather smaller, but these appear to me to be vegetative variations.
Here and there I find a calice with its septa having relatively long teeth, and this fact,
coupled with the number of septa, causes me to consider F, bertholleti to be merely a
synonym, as indeed I deem all those suggested by Klunzinger.

21. Favia adduensis, n. sp. (Pl. LXII. fig. 6.)

Colony massive, or somewhat incrusting. Calices irregular, seldom rounded, angular,
elongated, twisted or gyrose, largest 10 by 5 mm., average 6 to 7 by 4 mm. 3 to 4 mm.

MADREPORARIA. 767

deep. Walls, either—over the greater part—rounded or slightly pointed above, not more
than 15 mm. thick, with septa ‘5 mm. exsert, not generally extended horizontally, continuous
between calices, or—a few places at the edges—3 mm. or more thick with distinct furrows
but theca never visible. Septa irregular, often 2 or 4 (presumably primaries) very much
thicker (‘5 mm.) with exsert parts horizontally extended—evidently showing where division
is ultimately to take place—in the average calice about 21 in number, often the smaller
curving round to fuse with the larger, all thin with the exception of the large primaries,
granular on the sides, finely but very irregularly toothed, the lowest teeth of about 12 of the
largest rough, pointed and perpendicular, forming a more or less conspicuous pali-crown.
Columella always distinct, rather dense, commonly at least a quarter of the breadth of the
calice, formed by finely anastomosing trabeculae from at least one half of the septa. In
section (which is not very clear) the exo- and endothecal parts appear rather vesicular, walls
compact.

Locality. From the outer slope of the reef of Addu, 25 7, The specimen (15 x 11 x7 em.)
is more or less incrusting and relatively thin. The species is nearest allied to the last, but
markedly differs from all known forms of the genus.

22. Favia cavernosa (Forsk.). (EIS DX figs 13;)) Klzs p26; 1. 4

I refer to this species a rounded mass, 22 cm. in diameter, dead in centre but surrounded
by a belt 14 em. broad, still living when obtained, and a second, dead in places, 15 em. in
diameter by 13 cm. high. The second has rather thinner walls, higher calicular edges,
thicker costae and septae than the first. Both, especially the second, show recognisable,
paliform lobes in a few calices. The septa may be thickened or not, where they join the
theca. Traces of costae without corresponding septa are often present. Only in isolated
calices can the columella be termed “sehr wenig entwickelt,’ being generally nearly as_ well
marked and of the same nature as in F. denticulata.

There appears to me to be little or no doubt as to the identity of these specimens with
Klunzinger’s species, the figure of which is good. I accept the latter’s synonymy, but I am
doubtful as to Favia okeni.

Locality. Minikoi, larger from the flat behind the boulder zone, and smaller from a
lagoon shoal. ;

23. Favia affinis Ed. and H. (Pl. LXII. figs. 22 and 23.)

Ed. and H., 1. p. 429. Gard., p. 750.

Three quite small specimens with ordinary calices (not undergoing fission) varying up
to 13 mm. long and 9°5 broad, and walls up to 3 mm. in thickness but averaging about half
this. The theca of the separate calices is not generally distinct, their exothecal connections
usually in the form of vesicles, convex above, and not mere dissepiments. The septa are
1 to 2 mm. exsert above the theca. The line of junction of the costae of neighbouring
corallites is shown by a very distinct notch or furrow, and in this position delicate, transverse
connections tend to form between them, where growth is vigorous. The edges of the septa
over the theca may be thickened, and are edged with fine teeth. They vary in number up
to 30, of which about half extend into the calice to form with fine, twisted trabeculae from
their edges a small columella, against which they end in relatively thick, blunt, often spined,
paliform teeth.

768 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

The septa, where they pass into the theca, are often quite hollow. The endothecal
dissepiments, distant 1°5 to 2 mm., commonly extend downwards from the theca at an angle
of about 45°. All parts tend to be excessively thin and delicate, though the hollow, rough
nature of the septa, together with their small number in the large calices, gives the species
a coarser and more open appearance than any other in the collection. It differs in the vesicular
exotheca (difficult generally to distinguish, chambers about 1 mm. high) from F. cavernosa,
the possible variation of which in most other points might well cover it. Its form of growth
is bigger but otherwise closely related to F. denticulata.

Locality. Hulule, W. reef (calices slightly smaller than in the other specimens, distinct
furrow, septa less exsert but thicker edged, paliform lobes less marked), Minikoi, lagoon shoal
(very light and of most vigorous growth) and a doubtful fragment from the reef-flat.

24. Favia denticulata (Ell. and Sol.). (Pl. LXI. figs. 14—18.)

Madrepora denticulata, Ell. and Sol. Zooph. p. 166, pl. 49, fig. 1 (1786), Favia
denticulata, Ed. and H., 1. p. 428 (non Astraea denticulata, Dana, p. 234, 1846, Gard.,
p. 748), Favia denticulata, Klz, p. 27, 1879. ?syn. F. urvilleana, F. doreyensis,
F. geoffroyi, F. aspera, all Ed. and H.

The characters of this extraordinarily variable species are as follows: Colonies very
markedly massive in growth, closely incrusting at edges with a quite determinate, transversely
marked epitheca. Walls always with upper edges of theca distinct and slightly raised above
the top dissepiments, 2 to 4 mm. thick. Calices always rounded, elongated, or a little distorted
where dividing, often somewhat oval, average size varying from 6 to 10 mm. in diameter and
2 to 6 mm. in depth. Costae commonly continuous between calices, always sloping below level
of top of theca (hence very distinctly furrowed appearance, or series of notches on the walls),
and equal in number to the septa, but sometimes additional ones marked by fine linear ridges
or lines of granules or spinules (especially where septa are less numerous). Septa always
somewhat exsert (‘5 to 2°5 mm.), always arched above, upper end almost horizontal, 20 to 40
(generally 24 to 34) in number, no distinct cycles, outer halves almost perpendicular, closely
set with small, fine, subequal teeth, commonly on 10 to 20 of the larger septa passing below
into 1 or more upstanding paliform lobes, or at least ending perpendicularly against the
axial fossa. Colwmella + to 1 breadth of calice, flat-topped, spongy, formed by very fine, much
twisted trabeculae from the 10 to 20 larger septa. In section exothecal dissepiments 1 mm.
apart, horizontal, endothecal same, often rather oblique to 50°.

It will be obvious even from the above description that the corallum varies extraordinarily
in external appearance, a form with calices averaging 10 mm. in diameter by 5—6 in depth,
with marked furrows, thick, rough septa with broad, paliform lobes, superficially having little
resemblance to one averaging 7 mm. by 3 mm., no furrows, thin, smooth septa and little
or no paliform lobes. Yet all are clearly joimed by their distinct, never angular nor gyrose
calices, thick walls with larger or smaller furrows above, septa arched and of similar shape,
mode 25 to 29, and spongy columella. In my specimens all other characters show variation,
a little in each colony but in most characters far. more in the series. Any one character
may become definitely fixed im any locality in any type of the series and give a definite
species. I affix a name and a list of synonyms, but I recognise my temerity in so doing
partly for the above-mentioned reason, and partly because the descriptions commonly given
by older authors were quite inadequate, often from single specimens or from unknown
localities.

MADREPORARIA. 769

The only purely vegetative variations appear to me to be thickness of walls, distance
apart, obliquity and thickness of dissepiments, degree of spinulation of faces of septa and
costae, though all others undoubtedly show a certain amount of this class of differences. In
the accompanying Table I have attempted to show the variations for the average sized
corallites of the several specimens, taking in each case what appear to be their most vigorously
growing, 7.e. upper surfaces, and finding the average size from a measured patch (excluding
obviously young forms) and in each measurement taking an average. Some of the smaller
specimens are young colonies.

Locality. Found commonly everywhere in the Maldives and in Muinikoi, on the outer
slope, any flat reasonably bare of sand and on the lagoon shoals. Nos. 1 and 2 in the Table
have septa thickened up to 1 mm., where they pass into the theca. Colour, brown to green,
darker over walls.

25. Favia laccadivica, n. sp. (Pl. LXII. fig. 24.)

Colony massive, edges closely encrusting, thick transversely marked epitheca. Walls thick,
except where fission taking place, generally not less than 2 mm., top exothecal dissepiment
level with top of theca. Calices always rounded, often oval, average diameter in different parts
8 to 9 mm., depth 2°5 to 45 mm. Costae, equal, finely toothed, almost flat-topped between
calices (no notch), slight tendency to join transversely, on thicker walls smaller costae often shown
by a few or a row of spines, represented by septa IV. Septa, 1 to 15 mm. exsert, very flat-
topped, 4 cycles, not very distinct or regular, 12 to 16 reaching columella, 12 to 16 intermediate,
equal in thickness, two-thirds way to columella, often fusing to the first series, and 24 to 32
generally minute, angular ridges between the larger, often wanting; septa I, II. and III. fine
pointed teeth, not crowded, passing into ridges on their slightly granular sides, commonly 12 to
16 with the lowest a larger pointed tooth rising about 2 mm. above the fossa, forming a pali-
crown. Colwmella quite distinct, + width of calice, flattened twisted plates from about 12 septa.
In section exothecal dissepiments thin, flattened or arched, the convexity above, 1 mm. apart,
endothecal thin, oblique (60°), 1 to 15 mm. apa \t.

The specimens are very markedly different from any other Favia I have in the collection
owing to the great regularity in thickness of all their parts, exsertness, teeth, etc. of the
septa and the complete absence of a furrow. I cannot find any described species, which in
any way resembles it. The specimens show singularly little variation, those on the sides
merely have thicker walls and costae IV. accordingly more distinct.

Locality. Three specimens from lagoon shoals, Minikoi. Colour, grey over walls, dark
green peristome.

26. Favia hululensis, n. sp. (Pl. XLI. 19—21.)

I refer four massively growing, complete colonies and two smaller pieces to this species.
It differs from F. denticulata in the following characters: Walls, thm (1 to 2 mm.), theca
very distinct above the top exothecal dissepiment. Calices more compressed, sometimes angular
or oval, average size 5—7°5 mm. in diameter, 3—4 mm. deep. Costae continuous between
calices, notched, generally no furrow, sometimes traces of transverse connections, equal im number
to septa. Latter ‘5—2 mm. exsert, flat-topped, about 20, cycles more or less distinct, outer
part of slope perpendicular; teeth variable, on the exsert part small, pointed, round, and inside
the calice generally none or only 2 or 3, small, well separated and pointed, often the lowest
on 6 to 8 of the larger septa blunt, paliform, otherwise these septa perpendicular against axial

770 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

TABLE OF MEASUREMENTS
of sixteen specimens of Favia denticulata and five of Favia hululensis.

2 :
Size of Specimen 3 = ise *
in em. 2 =| ae 3 = g
ra Te o | Qe 7h a Ss 2
5 os a] aco S 23 = :
g mE g-5 38 be = g Locality
5 ro] fs| ~ 2a a 8 gs 3 ES 3 5 a
a % ro ash O -m og aS = 3. 3 Ss
Be Wee eee ce celica Hea an mesa is 3
oa 3 at 4 oO
Sc eh eS 2 Be a
=)
1 16 12 10 9°3 3:2 16 29 19 1, 1 Minikoi, sand flat
2 15 10 9 95 4 15 29 17 R + lagoon shoal (fig. 14)
3 18 16 11 9 5 2 30 14 DF Goidu, behind boulder zone
(fig. 15)
4 15 9 10 88 5 18 29 14 2 » outer slope
5 8 4 3 86 45 17 29 14 2 op
6 10 8 6 91 4 18 29 15 DME Hulule, sand flat
a 15 13 9 8-4 35 15 28 14 DFP Minikoi, lagoon shoal
By |) tee ks || ail 8 35 1 Mo || aie || iy 12 » (fig. 16)
9 19 15 10 7 3-2 1:2 27 14 13, 12 3
LON) eee |eets ele era 68 2:8 12 2% | 14 | DP » (fig. 17)
11 9 6 7 8 3 15 26 14 DF Hulule, west reef
12 7 6 5 75 2°6 1 26 13 0 » east reef flat
13 15 13 13 73 3 1 22 9 0 » passage (fig. 18)
14 15 7 10 8:3 3 1 24 12 Gre Minikoi, sand flat
15 6 7 5 63 3 153 22 11 CEE » reef flat (Young)
16 8 6 5 63 3 1 20 13 DF Goidu, reef flat (Young)
1 11 10 8 GG} 25 15 20 9 1, 1 Hulule, west reef (fig. 19)
2 22 15 11 5 3 75 18 8 0 » south reef (fig. 20)
3 ns lige Wan 6 2°5 125 | 19 | 10 | RP » east reef flat
4 10 9 7 6 4 “75 22 8 0 35 passage (fig. 21)
5 7 7 5 55 - 35 1:25 17 8 2 Goidu, reef flat

* R=recognisable, D=distinct, C=conspicuous, P=pointed, F=flattened.

MADREPORARIA. aval

fossa. Colwmella not more than 4 breadth of calice, generally very small, often rudimentary,
formed by the much flattened trabecular ends of 6 to 8 septa. Jn section rather massive,
exothecal dissepiments thick, 1 mm. apart, endothecal thin, horizontal, about 6 mm.

The species is rather like a small edition of F. denticulata, but differs in its thin walls,
number of septa, number of septa forming the columella, and character of last. The specimens
show similar variability, and I likewise enumerate them in tabular form. No. 1 differs some-
what from the rest; it has some rather larger calices with very exsert septa, and a greater
number reach the columella and have paliform lobes, but these differences are due to the
fact that the colony is evidently growing very vigorously and its corallites rapidly dividing.
No. 4 is possibly a little doubtful on account of its deeper calices, septa larger in number
(last 6 to 10 exceedingly minute), little exsert (‘75 mm.), costae little notched and transversely
connected; it is growing on a column of horny sponge, 10 cm. high by about the same thick,
which itself was attached to a muddy bottom.

27. Favia hombroni (Rousseau). (Pl. LXII. fig. 27.) Ed. and H., p. 435.

Two specimens which differ only in not being “en masse gibbeuse et sublobée,” but
massive and rounded and in the columella not being “assez distincte,’ but the distinct, rather
flattened, trabecular junctions of about 6 septa. I give certain characters of my specimens.

Calices rounded, oval or angular, averaging about 3 mm. in diameter, though varying up
to 6 mm., theca generally quite distinct above the top exothecal dissepiment. Walls ‘75—1 mm.
thick, except at the edges, where this may be doubled, covered by thin, smooth, sub-equal
costae (5—75 mm. exsert), continuous between calices, horizontal, no furrow nor distinct notch.
Septa almost smooth-sided and thin, cycles I. and II. and about half of III., scarcely visibly
toothed, I. rather broader over wall and with a crown of fine, pointed, paliform teeth, often
joined by 1 to 3 septa of cycle II. Columella generally as above at the surface, underneath
much larger and of a more solid appearance.

Locality. Hulule passage, a small colony 10 by 8 by 7 em., and Minikoi, almost in boulder
zone, a head dead in the centre.

28. Favia halicora (Ehrb.) Kiz.
Goniastraea halicora Klz., p. 32, Iv. 1 and 2, and x. 3a and b.

Four specimens, two large ones approaching forma obtusa Kz. and two pieces with smaller
calices rather more doubtful, more like forma acuta Klz., the pali in reality being only teeth
and the theca of neighbouring calices not fused though the walls are very dense, perhaps
almost solidified by the exotheca.

The specimens are as follows: (1) half a large head, 22 cm. wide, 13 em. broad, and 18 em.
high, walls rounded, though not so much as in Kilz.’s fig. 1, septa 28 to 36, half with blunt,
thick pali, Minikoi, lagoon shoal; (2) a colony dead above, 16 x 14 x 8 cm., part like last, part
very obtuse walls, columella then often papillated above, Minikoi, inner part reef-flat to south ;
(3) a colony, 8 x 6 x 5 em., calices about 8 mm., very rapidly dividing, resembles part of (1) but
nearer acuta in walls, Turadu, 8. Mahlosmadulu, reef-flat; (4) a colony 12 x 6 x 6 em.. calices
75 mm., rapidly dividing, very acute walls, Goidu, reef-flat.

29. Favia parvimurata, n.sp. (Pl. LXII. fig. 25.)

Colony massive, covered underneath by a thick, transversely marked epitheca. Calices
generally pentagonal or hexagonal, 8—12 mm. (mode 9—9°5 mm.) in diameter, 3 mm. deep or

Ch itt 99

Beted, J. STANLEY GARDINER.

less. Walls exceedingly thin at edge, sometimes fenestrated or not completely formed, thicker
below but except at the edge of the colony not more than 1 mm., covered by the continuous
unnotched, rather pointed and strongly toothed, exsert (1—2 mm.) ends of the septa. Latter,
16—26 (average 21) in number, generally hollowed where they pass through the walls, rather
thick, with rough granular or spiny sides, a few coarse, pointed teeth, about half ending
against the axial fossa with great, thickened and pointed teeth, or all variants to a_ thick,
perpendicular edge or thick teeth merging into the columella. Latter + to + diameter of
calice, formed by the anastomosis of flattened trabeculae from half to two-thirds of the septa
(as many as can crowd round the fossa), commonly ending above in more or less flattened
rods, Jn section, walls almost solid save for spaces due to the hollow septa, endothecal dis-
sepiments very oblique, 30° to wall, thin, 1—2 mm. apart.

Locality. Hulule; reef-flat to east. The species approaches closest perhaps to F. halicora
(Ehrb.), but the wall, largely formed by the lateral fusions of the hollow septa, is exceedingly ©
remarkable.

XII. Genus Goniastraea.

Kd. and H., u. p. 444, and Gard., p. 746.

By the removal of G. halicora I have restricted the genus to forms of which the
theca of neighbouring calices completely fuse, and which have true pali, not mere paliform
teeth.

The genus is of little importance from its number of species, but possesses in G.
retiformis a form of wide distribution and great importance on the coral reefs of the
Maldives, and so far as I saw, of still greater abundance off Ceylon, both at Tondimanar
and also at Weligama.

30. Goniastraea retiformis (Lmk.). Klz., p. 35, Iv. 5, G. eximia Gard., p. 747.

I refer fourteen specimens to this species, which I have no doubt Klunzinger has
identified correctly. The columella, which he does not describe, appears in some of the
specimens like a small solid mass in the centre of the calice, but in others is clearly made
up of a dense mass of trabeculae from the paliform septa. My specimens vary somewhat
in the size of the calice, averaging about 4 by 3 mm., the longest not as yet showing
division being 6 by 4mm. The pali average in different specimens 7, 8, 9 or 10, but 8 is
the mode; occasionally they are not present as upstanding rods, but yet are clearly repre-
sented by the much thickened edges of the septa. G. eximia from Fiji, Rotuma, ete. is
the same species, but the mode of its pali is 9 or 10, and its appearance in section. is
rather more delicate than in most of my specimens.

Locality. This golden-green coloured species is common on the outer slope, occasionally
occurs on the reef-flat in small heads, and is abundant in the lagoon both at Minikoi and
in the Maldives. It often forms immense masses, which on the shallow flat behind the
boulder zone die in the centre but spread linearly, the blocks in growth resembling massive
Porites. Two specimens came from the passage into Hulule.

31. Goniastraea solida (Forsk.). (Pl. LXII. fig. 28.) Ed. and H., 11 p. 455.
A specimen agrees in every respect with the description of this species, which is not,
as Klunzinger supposed, synonymous with G. pectinata or G. favus. It resembles the first

MADREPORARIA. 773

in the columella and in the nature and shape of its septa, but their upper edges over the
theca are often rather pointed than flattened. The pali are the thickened, perpendicular,
inner edges of 8—12 septa. The endothecal dissepiments are thin and practically horizontal,
generally -5—6 mm. distant, seldom or never more. The walls in section are about 2 mm.
thick, but on the surface in any rapidly growing part may be quite thin, evidently thickening
later by a deposition of solid endotheca between the septa.

Locality. A single specimen from the passage at Hulule. It is No. 5, p. 331 of Vol. 1
of this publication; its specific gravity 2°11 is greater than that of any other Astraeid that
I have taken.

32. Goniastraea pectinata (Ehrb.). Klz., p. 34, Iv. 6.

Three specimens, the third very small, are undoubtedly referable here, though Ehrenberg’s
specimen is, I consider, scarcely typical of the species. The wall is thin, though the whole
ridge with its very slightly exsert (never more than ‘5 mm.) septa, horizontally edged above,
varies from 2 to 4 mm, The septa are occasionally very thin, but in most parts, to the lens,
appear rough-sided and relatively thick; they are more often continuous between calices than
alternating, and are subequal in size, but in some places very rudimentary ones of cycle IV.
are found between the larger. The pali are rough sided plates in front of, but not in
surface view connected with, the septa; their number varies with the length of the corallites,
but m rounded calices their mode is 10 or 11. At the edge and on the under side of the
colonies the walls may become much thicker, but the whole ridge (including the septa) varies
but little; the pali sometimes are spiniform. The columella is merely the junction of the
paliform septa to one another, and may be scarcely visible, plate-like or obviously formed
by flattened trabeculae.

Locality. Goidu, reef-flat, Turadu, S. Mahlosmadulu, flat behind boulder zone, and
S. Male, 18 f The latter is a little colony with 35 rather shallow calices, with very thick
walls (3 mm.) having traces of a grove.

33. ?Goniastraea favus (Forsk.). Klz., p. 34, Iv. 4 and x. 7.

The broken-off edge of a colony, 7:5 x 3 cm. by 4 em. thick, possibly belongs to this
species, with the characters of which it is in general agreement. It does not show clearly

its mode of increase though sections lead me to believe that it is by fission. The specimen
was dredged from 20 f, Suvadiva.

XII. Genus Aphrastraea.
34, Aphrastraea deformis (Lmk.). (Pl. LXIII. fig. 31.) Kd. and H., 1. p. 452.

I refer four specimens to this species, nos, 1 and 2 of which agree closely with one
another and correspond in all described characters with the species and also genus, of which
it was in Ed. and H.’s catalogue the sole representative. The walls have a distinét theca
which may show as a very thin, polygonal ridge between the calices, but their greater part
is formed by the small vesicles or cells of the endotheca, which rise to within ‘5 mm. of
the upper edges of the septa; they thus appear enormously thick up to 5mm. The septa
are continuous between the calices or stop at the theca; they lie in four cycles of which
I. and IL. typically have rough upstanding, pointed, paliform lobes, though II. is not in this
respect always complete. Septal cycles III. and IV. are scarcely separable and mere little

99—2

774 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

spined ridges between the larger; more than half of IV. is seldom present. The teeth of
all are rough, low, saw-like but not crowded, rather irregular. The columella is formed of
flattened trabeculae from septa I. and II.

Locality. (1) A flattened mass 85 x 3 cm. by 4 em. thick, Minikoi, coral flat near
Wiringili; (2) a similar mass 14 x 12 cm. by 4 em. thick, Suvadiva, 40 f; (3) a flattened
piece of a colony, deformed with barnacles and worms, 7 x 6 cm., with smoother septa and
rather deeper calices, and with endotheca more solid, Suvadiva, 20 f; (4) a flat, thin, rough,
little colony with wavy epitheca underneath, 4 x 4 cm., quite similar to 1 and 2 but rougher
in appearance owing to the longer septal teeth, cycle IV. larger and more regular, often
cycles fusing, columella relatively larger, South Male, 30 7

XIV. Genus Orbicella.

I must still assert my imability to find characters which clearly separate Plesiastraea
and Leptastraea from this genus (P.Z.S. 1899, p. 751). Generic characters are presumably
more ancient than specific, or at any rate have become absolutely fixed. Such may be
crystallisng between the three genera, but at present the process is quite incomplete.

Distribution. The genus has two very common reef-species, O. ehrenbergana and
transversa, capable of living absolutely under the breakers where also O. annuligera dwells.
O. laxa forms great masses on the lagoon shoals at Minikoi, where O. minikoiensis is
very common in one small area. One specimen of the genus was dredged, but that from
4 f. only. Colowr invariably some shade of green.

35. Orbicella annuligera Ed. and H.! (Pl. LXIII. fig. 32.) Ed. and H., 1. p. 471.
Astrea annularis Q. and G., Zooph. p. 210, Pl. 17, figs. 17—18, 1833.

Four specimens correspond in every respect with the above descriptions. The septa and
costae are rough and the latter thick, septal teeth very low except the innermost, which is
always paliform, thickened and pointed, the series forming a well-defined crown 1—2 mm.
above the columella. Ordinarily 12 fuse in the centre of the calice and have paliform lobes,
but in the larger corallites there may be 14 or 16, the increase entailing the presence of septa
of the fourth cycle. The columella is dense, formed by trabeculae from the septa, which
often fuse even outside the level of the pal so that the latter may appear to arise from
its surface. The corallites vary up to 75 mm. in diameter and the calices to 45 mm.

Locality. Minikoi, reef-flat, and Goidu, EK. reef, breaker zone. The former specimens
have deeper calices, in some places a little distorted, and smoother septa and costae than
the latter. All are quite thin and small, mere living fragments, probably of once much larger
spreading masses. Colour a brilliant yellow all over.

36. Orbicella minikoiensis, n. sp. (Pl. LXIIL. fig. 35.)

Colony massive; under the overhanging edges longitudinally ridged costae, no distinct
epitheca. Corallites, 11—14 mm. in diameter, almost flat, often somewhat distorted by the
intercalicinal budding. Calices generally round, 8—10 mm. in diameter, varying from flat to

' J fully accept Vaughan’s synonymy of O. acropora, the limits of its variability. There is a close connection
U.S. Fish Commission Bulletin, vol. u. p. 301, 1900. The between the two species, however, and one could have wished
specimens identified by me from Rotuma are rather different that Vaughan, after having made certain of O. acropora,
from the present ones of annuligera, but scarcely exceed had redescribed it.

MADREPORARIA. 775

2mm. in depth. Walls up to 3mm. thick, sharp edged against the interseptal loculi but
no distinct theca, slightly grooved in the centre. Septa much thicker, up to 1 mm. where
they pass through the theca, slightly different in size, those of the lowest (I. and II.) cycles
largest, 1—3 mm. (commonly about 2 mm.) exsert. Costae relatively thick, with low blunt
teeth, sometimes passing from calice to calice, but always with a distinct notch over the
furrows of the walls. Septa varying in number, typically 24, thinning out within the calice,
alternately larger and smaller, with granular sides; each provided with about six bluntly
pointed teeth, the third or thereabouts often longest and sometimes representing the most
exsert portion of the septum, no distinct paliform teeth, sometimes tertiaries fused to secondaries
or primaries, otherwise all merging below into the columella. The latter ranging in size from
one-third to one-half the diameter of the calice, from the surface looking fasciculated, but
really formed by coarse, anastomosing and uprising trabeculae from the septal edges. Jn
section the walls appearing relatively compact, partly owing to thick costae but also to the
relatively thick, horizontal, exothecal dissepiments, endothecal dissepiments sloping into the
columella at an angle of about 55° to the thecal walls, about 1mm. apart, rather varied.
Increase only by intercalicinal budding.

The form is most distinct owing to its very shallow calices, large columella and_ thick,
exsert septa. The only real variation is in the depth of the calices, those near the edges
being rather deeper. Of Ed. and H.’s species the specimens are closest to O. lamarckana,
but the costae are different.

Locality. Muinikoi, three specimens, not common, sand-flat behind boulder zone to west
and south of the atoll.

37. Orbicella laxa Klz (Pl. LXIII. fig. 33.) Klz., p. 49, v. 8 and x. 9.

Four specimens closely corresponding to the above description and the sections shown in
Pl. X. fig. 9, but differing from Pl. V. fig. 3, in having a considerably more solid and massive
appearance with calices a trifle larger (8 mm.). Budding in my specimens is intra- as well
as extracalicinal.

The corallites vary considerably. In the most vigorously growing parts their thecal edges
may be upstanding (calices 4mm. deep from top of theca to top of columella); septa very
thin, 1—1‘5 mm. exsert, about 18 reaching the columella, most with fine paliform lobes. In
other parts the calice is more pad-like at the edge, no visible theca, 1—3 mm. deep, often
with additional, very small costae not represented by septa; latter thick and rough, less than
1 mm. exsert, 10—12 reaching columella with thick, blunt, paliform lobes, sometimes projecting
above the level of the theca.

Locality. (1) Lagoon, flat behind Ragandi Islet, Minikoi; (2) lagoon shoal, Minikoi ;
(8) Hulule, west reef; (4) Goidu, sand-flat behind boulder zone. No. (3) is a separate,
rounded colony, 13 cm. in diameter by 8 cm. high; the rest are larger blocks from the living
edges of great massive colonies, most parts of which have for some cause or other been
killed. Colour, light green over the theca, very dark orange-green on the peristome.

38. Orbicella borradailei, n. sp. (Pl LXIITL. fig. 34.)

Colony massive, rather irregular, covered under the edges by a distinct, transversely
waved epitheca. Corallites, 11—15 mm. in diameter, edges raised into broad, padded rings
2—5 mm. high, somewhat crowded together and distorted, especially on the inequalities.
Calices also distorted, 9—11 mm. in diameter, 3—6 mm. deep, no theca visible from surface

776 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

view, separating furrow naturally very marked. Costae low, thick and broad, alternately thicker
and thinner, hence in two series, the thinner very commonly with no corresponding septa
visible, all set on their edges with low, transversely extending granulations. Septa, 35—40 in
number, alternately larger and smaller, yet both series varying somewhat in size, roughly
granular at the sides, 1—2 mm. exsert, all rather thickened on passing into the theca, here
and there septa of the second series curving towards and uniting with one of the first; edges
sometimes no distinct teeth, sometimes about six low, rough ones, generally about 15 with
prominent, broad (1 mm.), thicker, uprising paliform teeth forming a definite crown. Columella,
2—3 mm. below the paliform crown, 1—1 of the calice in width, flat above, formed by rather
coarse, flattened trabeculae from about half of the septa. Jn section, the theca of the calices
very distinct, costae often continuous, exothecal dissepiments horizontal, thin, 1 mm. apart;
endothecal dissepiments thin, about 1 mm. apart, almost horizontal, in transverse section not
more than one visible between the theca and the columella. Increase generally by inter-
calicinal budding, occasionally intra-calicinal close to the margin, very rarely fission.

‘The species is very distinct from all previously described. There can be no doubt about
its being an Orbicella, but it closely resembles in its corallites some of the tubuliferous
Favia. The fact that the costae are about twice as numerous as the septa (about 76 to 42
in large calices) is most characteristic, but in places near the edges the septa and costae
often become quite thin, the smaller series of costae almost absent, paliform lobes little
marked and corallites less projecting.

Locality. Breaker zone of reef-flat close to Ragandi Islet, Minikoi.

39. Orbicella ?curta Dana. Zooph. p. 209, x. 3, Gard., p. 754.

A small fragment from N. Mahlosmadulu, 4, comes near this species, but the septa are
rougher toothed and more equal.

40. Orbicella (Leptastraea) immersa Klz. Kz, p. 47, vi. 1.

A rounded mass, 7 cm. long, once completely covered by living polyps, now dead in places,
certainly belongs to this species, though the calices are in parts shghtly smaller with rougher
septa.

Locality. From the passage at Hulule.

41. Orbicella (Leptastraea) ehrenbergana (Ed. and H.), Kz.

Ed. and H., 1. p. 494, D. 7. 4, Kiz., p. 46, vi. 3 and Leptastraea transversa Klz., p. 46,
vi. 2, Orbicella klunzingeri Gard., p. 755.

Nineteen specimens, some of which agree absolutely with the one description of Klunzinger
and some with the other, but most of which are intermediate in some of their characters. Ed.
and H.’s description and figures differed so widely from Klz.’s that I did not consider that
these authors were referring to the same species when I examined my collections from the
Pacific. My present large series, together with my two Pacific Ocean specimens, shows the
variation to be so great that there can be no doubt of the identity.

It appears to me useless to attempt to re-describe the species from any central form,
especially as any large collection is likely to have forms almost exactly similar to Klz.’s
ehrenbergana or the same author’s transversa from precisely the same locality or even
eavironment, certainly at any rate from the breaker zone or flat of any reef. Yet, in certain
calices of these forms variations may be found connecting them together, though one part of

MADREPORARIA. alan

a colony does not apparently belong distinctly to one form and one to the other. We have
here accordingly both classes of variation, (1) the vegetative, mainly seen in the thickness of
the walls, sizes of calices, number and shape of septa and the size of the columella, and
(2) the normal, seen in the shapes of corallites, characters of dividing furrows, depth of calices,
nature of columella, besides in some of the characters of (1), indeed in most of those which
caused Klunzinger to separate ehrenbergana and transversa. There is no trace of dis-
continuous variation in my specimens, though Klunzinger is probably dealing with it. In the
remarks on the variation of the individual organs which I have to offer below, it is certain
that I am dealing mainly with the normal, though it is clear that one cannot as yet, with
a study of only 21 specimens, draw a line between the variations. Between each form of
any organ mentioned I have found numerous intermediates.

The colonies are of two indistinctly divided types, (@) flattened incrusting, often rising up
into rounded hillocks which tend to become loosened, and covered all over with the living
tissues, and (b) massive, more rounded, frequently of considerable thickness and always very
dense and heavy. Though there are marked exceptions (a) certainly approach closer in their
other characters to Klunzinger’s ehrenbergana and (b) to transversa. The corallites are
quite rounded, or even angular or distorted, or crowding over one another; dividing furrows
very narrow, not visible to the unaided eye or 1 mm. broad, depth *1—1 mm., where very
small a mere flat area between neighbouring calices. Costae never continuous between calices,
often not visibly present. Calices varying in shape according to the corallites, theca visible or
not, depth from 1 to 4mm. Septw 24—44, mode about 28 or 30, not at all or very little
exsert, generally thickened where they join the theca, quite smooth, thin, somewhat distant
to very densely crowded, sometimes arched at their sides and upper ends, sometimes flattened
above and falling perpendicularly; generally no determinable cycles, I. and II. occasionally dis-
tinct and then equal. Columella formed by trabeculae from 12—20 septa, one-fourth diameter
of calice or scarcely visible, finely papillate or fasciculate above or merely a few twisted
trabeculae. Increase by extra- or intracalicinal budding. Fission extremely rare. Jn section
all more or less the same, little apparent variation.

Locality. The species is fairly common on the reef-flat near the breaker zone and on
the Maldive lagoon reefs, but seldom forms very large masses. Loose heads are frequently
found on the boulder zone, where there is little or no sand or in hollows between other
corals. When split open, their centres usually consist of their own remains, a good deal
broken down by boring animals, often with Lithodomus and Gastropods. Their surfaces
are frequently broken by the shield-hke ends of Pyrgoma and the smaller oval openings
of another barnacle in the walls. Generally the extreme forms are less affected than the
intermediates.

42. Orbicella (Leptastraea) bottai (Ed. and H.). (PI. LXIII. fig. 36.)

Cor. 11. p. 486. Klz., p. 44, v. 9 and x. 13 a and b. Leptastraea inequalis Kz, p. 45, v. 6.

I refer sixteen specimens to this species, with which Klunzinger’s second species is un-
doubtedly synonymous. The specimens vary greatly in their different parts, and as compared
with one another. The colonies are mostly rather flat and incrusting, but there is one large,
round one, and one smaller and oval, almost completely covered with polyps. The corallites
-are round or compressed, and have their edges scarcely rising above the general level, or
1 mm. upstanding above the furrows, isolated ones rising to 2 or 3 mm., or on hillocks, ete.,

778 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

pressing over one another, to the last belonging the round form which in this respect is
exactly as described by Klunzinger for L. inequalis. The calices of flat specimens and of
the round one average 2°5 mm. in diameter, or somewhat more hilly 35 mm., the living
edge of a once large mass 4 mm.; here and there a giant calice may be found, one rather
rough specimen with low calices averaging 3 mm. having a number of these standing up
for 2 or 3 mm. and being 45—6 mm. in diameter'. The costae may be distinct or not
visible, distance between the calices -5—2 mm. or more, especially on the under side. Septa
rough or quite smooth, in giant calices 38—40 down to 20 in the smaller ones, very rough
sided or almost smooth; in the round and most forms with larger calices, cycles I. and II.
quite equal, or in many of the smaller caliced flat forms I. distinctly larger than II. Columella
well developed or scarcely visible, in some cases in surface view clearly formed by trabeculae
which end above in fine points, in others like the end of a bundle of thick rods, formed
from 12 septa or more in the first case (round and most forms) and from 10, 8 or even 6
(one specimen) in the flat forms.

Locality. Common on the reef-flat at Minikoi and throughout the Maldives, rare on
lagoon reefs. Colour, a dark but brilliant green.

XV. Genus Cyphastraea.

Cyphastraea and Solenastraea Ed. and H., Cyphastraea Klunzinger.

The growth of the genus is mainly incrusting, though it frequently attains a thickness -
of several inches to a foot. It closely follows any inequalities on its base of attachment,
and tends, if it gets free, to round itself off and become completely covered with polyps.
More massive growths on any colony may rise into hillocks, which themselves frequently
become rounded off. The corallum below the living tissue forms a home for all sorts of
boring animals, and tends to become much broken up and hollowed even to within 3 or
4mm. of the living polyps.

Distribution. Occasionally found incrusting on the reef-flat, or breaker-zone, or on
lagoon shoals; free masses in protected situations of the same, but never on sand. Depth,
0 to 40 7 Colour, grey-green.

43. Cyphastraea forskaelana (Ed. and H.). Ed. and H., mu. p. 497.

Two colonies, both of which form masses much bored into and killed at the base, and
covered with convexities and humps, not free. The calices (2 mm. in diameter) are thick
edged and crowded together except underneath and near the edges of the colonies, rounded,
not distorted, commonly projecting for at least 1mm, wotheca appearing vesicular from the
surface, fairly dense in section, with a few, rough, pointed spinules, generally clearly connected
with the costae, which are little prominent and very rough, varying up to 24 in number.
Septa little exsert, sides covered with low, rough spinules, scarcely toothed, systems and
cycles quite distinct, primaries much more prominent and rougher, running right into a well-
developed, rather shallow, finely trabecular columella. Secondaries commonly much thinner,
and occasionally simulating the primaries and fusing with the columella, especially near the
edges, where the calices are more distant. Tertiaries very small.

1 Cp. Prof. Bell’s description of Variation in Turbinaria, Quar. Jour. Micros. Soc., 1895, p. 148, pl. 1 and 2.

MADREPORARIA. 779

The species has a much rougher appearance than C. savignyi, from which it differs
markedly in its septa. With Solenastraea forskaelana Ed. and H. the specimens agree in
all respects except in the different sizes of their septal cycles, but this is a variable character.

Locality. Hulule, (1) W. reef, and (2) passage through same.

44. Cyphastraea savignyi (Ed. and H.).
Ed. and H., 1. p. 485. Klz., p. 51, and Gard., p. 761.

Four specimens, all more or less rounded and completely covered by living polyps, of the
identity of which with the above no doubt can be entertained. One specimen, a ball, completely
corresponds to Klunzinger’s description, differing somewhat from his figure, to which a second
rather irregular specimen, evidently grown under bad conditions, completely answers. The
other specimens have slightly larger corallites, in exsertness intermediate to my Rotuma
specimen, but more crowded together. The costae are always very prominent and not rough.
The exotheca has tiny, somewhat scattered spinules, but in the second specimen referred to
appears from surface view to be vesicular. Twelve rather smooth septa typically fuse in the
columella, and are equal sized. The theca of the calices is often very delicate, giving their
edges a thin appearance.

Locality. Goidu, all from hollows of the reef-flat and boulder zone.

45. Cyphastraea hemprichana (Ed, and H.), Ed. and H., m1. p. 495.

A single specimen, almost completely surrounded by the corallites, a free edge showing
in one place covered by a dense epitheca, Calices on the upper surface crowded, about 1°5 mm.
in diameter, half this breadth distant from one another underneath, edges always distinct,
appearing more prominent owing to the slightly exsert upper ends of the septa. Exotheca
with a few, almost smooth spinules above, lower and scarcely visible below, not clearly
connected with the costae, which are quite distinct at the edges of the corallites. Septa
relatively smooth and very little toothed, edges almost perpendicular, 6 clear systems and
3 cycles quite distinct from one another, primaries meeting in the centre of the calice so
deep down as scarcely to be visible from the surface, shallower calices underneath.

Locality. Hulule, from the reef-flat of the south end.

46. Cyphastraea microphthalma (Esper). Ed. and H., 1. p. 485.

I refer to this species three specimens, which agree with the descriptions in all essential
characteristics. The corallites may be crowded or separated by half their diameter from one
another on the outgrowing edges, slightly (‘5 mm.) or not at all projecting, but always
distinct owing to the arched, slightly exsert, upper ends of the septa. Costae sunk in the
exotheca, edged with numerous, very rough, low spinules, giving a granular appearance. Septa
similarly very rough, as described by Ed. and H. Paliform teeth present or absent. Colwmella
always distinct, ending in papillae, or of a trabecular appearance. Hwotheca very dense, in
places almost solid, with here and there relatively large cavities.

Locality. (1) Turadu, S. Mahlosmadulu, W. reef, near breaker-zone, a rather smooth
incrusting mass, much studded with Pyrgoma up to the pores of which the corallum extends ;
(2) S. Male, 25 f.; (3) Suvadiva, 31 f, and (4) Addu, 40 f on the outer slope, both the latter
rough with trabecular columella and very indistinct paliform lobes.

G. IL 100

780 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

47. Cyphastraea suvadivae, n. sp.

Colony flat, incrusting, but probably showing all the regular shapes found in other species
of the genus, covered with round, scarcely projecting corallites. The latter 1—1‘5 mm. broad,
from 15—3 mm. distant from one another, joined by a vesicular exotheca covered with small,
low, blunt spinules, which near the calices may be arranged in lines leading to the low spines,
which represent the costal plates. Theca scarcely raised above the exotheca around the edge
of the calice, the ring-form being mainly due to the slightly exsert, upper edges of the septa.
Latter numbering 24, those of cycle III. very thin but generally distinct, projecting half-way
to the columella; those of cycles I. and II. nearly equal, with rough, spiny sides, giving them
a coarse appearance, edges bluntly notched, the inner teeth not distinguishable from the two
or three rough rods of the columella. Calices quite shallow, with a closed in appearance below.
The*exotheca is formed by minute cell-like vesicles. In some sections it almost simulates the
appearance found in Galaxea, but is clearly dependent on the costae. The endothecal
dissepiments are very thin, close together and almost horizontal.

The species approaches nearest to C. microphthalma, but differs in its more distant
calicles and much lighter and more open method of growth.

Locality. Six small pieces from Suvadiva, 20 f They are somewhat distorted on the
surface with barnacles and worm tubes, and the structure underneath more or less destroyed
to within 4 mm. of the surface by boring animals.

48. Cyphastraea maldivensis, n. sp.

Colony consisting of thin, incrusting masses, but probably showing all the shapes found
in the genus. Corallites round, practically not projecting, not more than 15 mm. broad,
generally separated by at least two or three times their diameter from one another, joined
by a glabrous looking exotheca, obviously even from the surface formed by very small, flattened
vesicles, often with their walls incomplete on the surface, but where complete studded with
low rounded granules. Costae practically non-existent, but tops of the septa a little projecting
over the upper ends of the calices, giving an appearance of rings slightly raised round their
edges. Septa 24, tertiaries distinct at edge of calice, projecting about one quarter way to
columella, ending perpendicularly inside with small, pointed teeth; primaries and secondaries
nearly equal, rather thin, slightly exsert, a few spines on the sides, ending inside with long,
thick, pointed, spiny teeth, extending almost at right angles over the axial fossa, the inner
parts of the septa by their fusion presenting sometimes a fenestrated appearance. Colwmella
formed by open trabeculae from the septal edges, a quarter to a third the width of the calice,
sometimes with points above but never papillary. The calices, owing to the small breadth
of the tertiary septa, the thin septa and large columella, appear relatively open.

The exotheca is more abundant and vesicular than it is in the last species, and _ still
more closely resembles Galaxea; the piling up of the vesicles on the surface between the
corallites is very distinct. The species more closely resembles the last than any other, but
differs in its surface appearance, thinner septa with long pointed teeth and trabecular
columella.

Locality. S. Nilandu, 25 f, and Felidu, 20 to 25 f.

MADREPORARIA.

Characters

Echinopora rosularia (Lmk.)

Echinopora solidior (Ed. & H.)

781

Echinopora tertia, n. sp.

10.

11.

Size of Calices.

Depth of Calices,

Edges of Calices.

Costae.

Number of Septa.
Character of Septa.

Columella.

Section a. Exotheca.
b. Endotheca.

ce, Septa.

Growth characters
and epitheca.

Locality.

Colour.

3x 4mm. or round.
Imm.

Little cones, 1—3 mm. high.
Septal spines thin, 1 mm.
high.

Very close set, fine lines,
made up of fine, low
(5 mm.), rounded spi-
nules.

16—24

I and II cycles subequal,
rough and thick at edge
of calice with 3 blunt,
rough teeth, 2 on exsert
upper edges, the 8rd and
innermost, only preseut
on about half, quite pali-
form; III very minute
and thin,

About } breadth of calice,
spongy, dense, very fine
trabeculae from about 10
septa.

Scarcely visible, very dense.
Not clear, horizontal (?).

Fenestrated ; especially line
outside pali lobes which
are hence true pali.

14 specimens, largest a foli-
ated cup 13x 18x9cm.
deep, ‘cm. thick, most
merely folia, one incrust-
ing 3°5 cm. thick. Epi-
theca 2°5em. from edge
which is evenly costu-
lated, smooth or minute
spines.

Common, W. Reef, Hulule,
foliated masses 2 feet or
more across, and a small
piece from Felidu, 14 7.

Green.

Comparison and Characters of Echinopora

6x5 mm. or round.
2mm.

Flat. Thick spines from
about 15 septa, 2 mm.
high, subequal.

Edge of colony lines of
flattened rough spinules,
1mm. high; central part
irregular.

24-—30

About 18, larger, rough,
thick at edge of calice,
no distinct teeth, rather
more than half with a
small thick paliform
tooth. Between last about
10 very minute septa.

Similar to last, but much
less dense and from about
18 septa.

Dense, vesicular.

Horizontal, 5 mm. apart,
thin.

As last.

A single folium 7 x 10 cms,
by 18 mm. thick in centre.
Epitheca to 5mm. of edge,
otherwise same as last.

Passage into Hulule.

Brown.

5—7 mm. x same.
15 mm.

Flat. Septa not more than
1mm. exsert, thin.

At edge lines centre irregu-
lar; vary from round,
smooth to characters of
last, always thinner,
75 mm. high,

36—48

Typically I and II larger
and subequal, rough, up-
permost tooth over theca
longest, lowest where pre-
sent very fine and sub-
paliform, III similar but
thinner; IV minute, com-
monly bend round and
fuse with III at middle
of their breadth.

Similar to last, rather hol-
lowed in centre from
about 14 septa.

Very dense, vesicular.

Irregular, little vesicular,
dense.

Perforated at edges;
true pali.

no

Two thick masses, largest
10 x 14cm. by 4em. thick,
incrusting thin at edges.
Epitheca, etc. same as
last.

Edge of S.W. Reef, Hulule.

Green- brown.

rosularia, solidior and tertia (see p. 782).

100—2

782 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

XVI. Genus LHchinopora,

Dana, p. 278. Ed. and H., 1. p. 621. Kiz., p. 54.

A genus closely allied to Trachypora (syn. Echinophyllia), which has been generally
confused with it. No specimens come from Minikoi. E. rosularia is alone abundant, but it
is very local and scarcely a reef-builder.

49. Echinopora rosularia (Lmk.). (Pl. LXIII. fig. 37.) Ed. and H., 11. p. 623.

50. Echinopora solidior (Ed. and H.). (Pl. LXIIL fig. 38.) Ed. and H., 11. p. 626.

51. Echinopora tertia, n. sp. (Pl. LXIII. fig. 39.)

The three above-mentioned species are evidently so closely allied that it seems most
useful to represent their characters in tabular form (p. 781). They are from the same locality
and also environment, but I cannot see that they show any signs of merging into one another.
One is naturally inclined to suspect a relationship to Klunzinger’s 3 species from the Red Sea

E. ehrenbergi, concamerata and carduus, but, if the characters of these forms be tabulated
and compared with the above, the whole six would appear to be different.

Doubtless all the three forms grow into the same shape under favourable conditions,
incrusting base rising into flat or rounded folia, on one side covered with polyps, but
oceasionally folia fusing so that both sides may appear to be so. The calices on the folia
often have their lower edges higher, where also the costae are more marked and longer spined
than on the incrusting base; otherwise variation is very slight and mostly vegetative. Increase
takes place as in other Echinopora.

52. Echinopora magna, n. sp. (Pl. LX. fig. 10.)

Colony foliate, epitheca thin, underside covered with rounded, radiating ridges, 8 in 1 cm.
Calices round, 7—9 mm. in diameter, lower sides much raised on folia so that the whole
opens upwards. Costae large and very thick alternating with much smaller and finer; the
larger with a few broad, blunt, low spines, at the lower edge of the calices much thicker
3 mm. long. Septa very thick, especially

and with two or three blunt spines or lobes, 2
at lower edges of calices, thin inside, about 12 subequal with often near their lower ends
two or three pointed teeth alternating with very small ones, corresponding to the smaller
series of costae. Columella about + breadth of calice, rising little below level of theca,
appearing finely paliform, really somewhat spongy and formed of trabeculae from half of
the septa. In section exo- and endothecal dissepiments more or less horizontal, thick or thin,
somewhat vesicular, 1—2 mm. apart.

The specimen is merely part of the foliated edge of a much larger colony. It appears
to be a true Echinopora, approaching the so-called E. aspera which is, according to Klunzinger,
a Trachypora (Fungidae).

Locality. S. Nilandu, 30 /

XVII. Genus Galaea.

The genus is mainly interesting from the fact that of the fourteen specimens obtained
nine were dredged from various depths down to 36 f,, outer slope and lagoon. Among Maldivan
reef forms the genus is rare.

MADREPORARIA. 783

53. Galaxea fascicularis (Linn.).
G. fascicularis et irregularis Ed. and H., 1. pp. 227 and 229; Klz., p. 78.

I refer eight specimens to this species from which I am unable to separate G. irregularis,
since they all show variations intermediate to the previously given characters of the two
species. The variation is well dealt with by Klunzinger for G. irregularis. One specimen
in places recalls G. musicalis, but elsewhere clearly belongs to facies irregularis.

Locality. Reef-flat, Addu and Turadu, 8S. Mahlosmadulu; west reef, Hulule; velu, Hulule,
6 f.; N. Male, 18 f. and 21 f.; Suvadiva, 20 f.

54, Galaxea musicalis (Linn.). Ed. and H., 1. p. 225.

I cannot define any specific characters beyond those given by Ed. and H. The larger
septa are 1—1‘5 mm. exsert, all are represented by costae, and all three cycles are generally
clearly visible; those of cycle I. are larger than IL, but both I. and II. fuse by trabeculae
in the axial fossa.

Locality. N. Male, 25 7; S. Male, 26 f, and Addu, outer slope, 25 f-

55. Galaxea hexagonalis, Ed. and H. Ed. and H., 1. p. 226.

A very much more delicate coral than G. fascicularis with septa 2—3 mm. exsert, much
more marked costae and a well-developed columella, formed of coarse trabeculae, quite distinct
even in the smallest corallites, besides all the other characters given by Ed. and H. The
perithecal vesicles are thinner walled and appear rather larger than in G. fascicularis.

Locality. Inner part of reef-flat of Minikoi and N. Male, 25 f, a few corallites. Colour,
transparent, hence appearing white, with peristome dark olive.

56. Galaxea lamarcki, Ed. and H. Kd. and H., u. p. 225.

Milne-Edwards published excellent figures of this species (Le Régne Animal de Cuvier,
Atlas, pl. 85, figs. 1, la—b) from which my specimen differs in having the corallites averaging
2—2°5 mm. in diameter, the primary septa 5—1 mm. exsert, in most calices 6 septa as in
fig. 1 fusing to form the columella, though certain rather larger and more upstanding calices
exactly resemble fig. 1 a, perithecal cells quite distinct on the surface, continuous throughout
and not in bands. The separate vesicles are larger than in any of the other species in the
collection, and the corallum is extremely light. Its under surface is covered by a distinct
epitheca.

Locality. S. Nilandu, 36 f

57. Galaxea, sp.?

A fragment with 20 corallites with perithecal vesicles very similar to the last but smaller,
corallites slightly larger and rising for less than 1 mm. above the peritheca, septa scarcely
exsert, fusion of primaries only in the axial fossa, septal cycle III. scarcely represented, corallites
6—9 mm. distant.

Locality. Felidu, 25 f.

784 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

XVIII. Genus Stephanocoenia.

58. Stephanocoenia maldivensis, n. sp. (Pl. LXII. figs. 29 and 30.)

Colony at first incrusting, then massive, covered up to the edge with a distinct epitheca.
Calices, polygonal, often somewhat elongated or distorted, 4—6 mm. in diameter, 2—4 mm. deep.
Walls, ‘5—2 mm. thick, pointed or not, covered by the exsert (1—1 mm.) rather angular or
slightly flattened ends of the septa, which may be continuous between the calices or alter-
nating. Septa, two series, 6—12 larger, subequal, scarcely toothed save for a crown of low,
rather pointed perpendicularly rising teeth against the axial fossa, and 6—12 very minute,
more or less alternating with the larger. Columella, a single fine, possibly somewhat bent
rod, occasionally branched once or twice, joined here and there by trabeculae to the septa.
In section walls solid or with a line of small vesicules in the centre; endothecal dissepiments
‘5 mm. apart, thin, rather irregular, almost horizontal, occasionally joined forming vesicles;
columella continuous from base; septa fenestrated, especially in a line behind their thickened
edges, which probably represent true pali. Increase by marginal budding.

Locality and variation. (1) The greater part of a colony 14x8 cm. by 6 em. thick
from outer edge to the fissure zone of Minikoi reef; colour, living, olive-brown; a heavy rounded
colony, walls 1—1°5 mm. thick, calices 4—4°5 mm. deep, 45 mm. in diameter, budding vigorous.
(2) Five pieces, all from Hulule, the largest an edge of an incrusting mass 12x9x3 em.
from the S.-W. reef; light, often very thin walls, rather irregular on surfaces, calices smaller
in hollows, generally about 4 mm. in diameter, rather shallow locul, septa often only 6—9
of the paliform series. (3) Four fragments from fissure zone of W. reef of Maradu, Addu;
heavy, rather approaching (1) but calices 5—5'5 mm. in diameter, not more than 3 mm. deep
and columella tending to become compound. (4) A small colony from the passage into
Hulule; large, elongated (5°5 mm.) calices, top endothecal dissepiments rising to within 1 mm.
of edges of septa and obliterating the columella.

XIX. Genus Acanthastraea.

59. Acanthastraea hirsuta, Ed. and H. Ed. and H., 1. p. 502, D. 5, 4
Var. microstoma, Klz. (Pl. LIX. fig. 6.) Kiz., p. 42, Ve 2.
Var. megalostoma, Klz. Klz., p. 42, V. 1.

In section my specimens have solid thick walls, 2—3 mm. thick, and dissepiments thin,
rather oblique, tending to be vesicular, 15—2 mm. apart. I can see no true columella, but
the section shows a mass of relatively large, blunt, obliquely upstanding teeth from about
a third of the septa, filimg up the axial space. My specimens in every part so distinctly
belong to one or other of the two forms as to suggest that Klunzinger is here dealing with
true varieties and not merely facies.

Locality. Minikoi, reef-flat (var. microstoma) and Hulule passage (var. megalostoma),
rare, only two specimens.

MADREPORARIA. 785

XX. Genus Prionastraea.

The genus is in its definition a most unsatisfactory one. It shows many resemblances
to Goniastraea, from which, owing to budding sometimes taking place close to the columella,
individual specimens can only be separated with difficulty. It assumes, indeed, the same
position in respect to it as Orbicella does to Astraea.

The species in the collection shows very distinct variation, which is mentioned under each.
In all characters it seems to be very largely correlated with environment, 7.e. vegetative. The
edges, the upper sides and lower parts perhaps of the several species, differ somewhat from
one another in the sizes, depth, thickness of walls, spinulation, etc. of the calices. Yet the
colonies of P. crassior and P. fusco-viridis clearly show that there are limits to this variation,
and that it follows along distinct lines for the several species. The two types of calices
described in P. robusta and P. magnistellata are also in this respect remarkable. The
number of the septa is fairly variable for each species, but the number which run into the
columella is about the same in all (18—24) owing to physical causes. The septa preserve
their type in each species, though this shows considerable variation in P. fusco-viridis,
apparently in this case largely connected with the several localities from which the specimens
were obtained.

Distribution. A common reef-builder, great masses on the outer slope to 15 /f, small
colonies on the reef-flat even under the breakers, very common on lagoon shoals, often forming
overhanging masses; vertical to 30 fathoms. Colour, generally brown to green. The colonies
tend to be much bored into by worms and other destructive organisms at the base, but
the surface is usually entire.

60. Prionastraea pentagona Klz. Klz., p. 39, Iv. 7, and x. 5.

A small specimen, 8 x 6 cm., from the breaker zone of the reef at Minikoi, closely
resembles Klunzinger’s description and figures of this species. The calices are rather smaller,
averaging about 65 x 5 mm., largest 85 x 5 mm.

61. Prionastraea spinosa Klz. Klz., p. 39.

A small specimen from S. Nilandu, 30 7, with a dozen corallites answering in every
respect to the above species save that it would appear to be in its structure rather more
delicate. The septal sides are a little rough and spiny.

62. Prionastraea robusta (Dana). (PI. LXIV. fig. 42.) Dana, p. 248, xr. 10.

A specimen similar to P. crassior in shape, with similar rough-sided septa with blunt,
spiny teeth (a little higher and more regular than Dana’s fig. 10), with nearly solid walls,
endothecal dissepiments about °5 mm, apart (in longitudinal section 3 cells in 2 mm.), not
very oblique. The columella is one-fourth to one-fifth the diameter of the calice, almost
flat-topped, dense, very finely trabeculate, spongy, and the innermost teeth of the septa,
especially in the deeper calices, simulate a paliform crown.

The specimen is part of a mass, one side and much of the top of which had been
killed apparently by sediment, while the other side was growing out vigorously underneath,
with a longitudinally striped, almost costate, lower surface, with no distinct epitheca such
as is generally found in the genus. Budding takes place near the centre of the calice so
as almost to simulate fission, a character considerably enhanced by the rapid formation of

786 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

the dividing walls. All the calices are polygonal with thin edges but may be divided into
two classes, (a) those on the top scarcely showing any budding, 10—14 mm. in diameter,
walls thin edged but 1—3 mm. thick at level of columella, septa about 34, alternately larger
and smaller, more than two-thirds reaching the columella, each with 6—10 low, subequal,
blunt, rough teeth, the innermost commonly larger and forming a little crown rising
15—2 mm. above the top of the columella, and (b) those to the sides, vigorously budding,
6—9 mm. in diameter, crowded, more irregular, less polygonal, walls thin, at level of columella
not more than 1 mm., same depth or even up to 5 mm. (hence appearing very markedly
different), septa about the same number alternately larger and smaller, less than two-thirds
reaching the columella, with 2—7 (commonly 3 or 4) much higher, irregular, very blunt and
spiny teeth, those round the pali narrower but not more marked than the rest, though rising
to the same height above the columella.

This extraordinary variation of the calices represents types as distinct as P. abdita and
profundicella, or P. sulfurea and quoyi (see Ed. and H.), and throws a considerable light
on the variability of the genus. It distinctly suggests that mere size has nothing to do
with the number of septa in adult calices.

Locality. Hulule, reef-flat to south-west.

63. Prionastraea crassior (Ed. and H.). (Pl. LXIV. figs. 45, 46.) Edi and Ee
p. 515.

I refer a specimen about 38 cm. long by 20cm. high and the same in thickness, and
probably having more than 2000 corallites, to this species, with the description of which it
corresponds in every particular.

The colony is a very large, heavy mass, rough and uneven (hilly) on the surface but
not in any way gibbous. It is covered with calices, the older of which average between
10 and 11 mm. in diameter, with younger ones of 5—7 mm. between. On the upper part
the calices are more or less polygonal, relatively deep (5—6 mm.), thin walled (seldom less
than 1 mm. except where a new calice has formed), but on the sides are more rounded or
oval, shallower, and much thicker walled (2—3 mm.). The septa are continuous over the
walls (1 mm. exsert), always slightly thickened, but quite markedly so towards the base of
the mass, where, on the top of the walls, they alternate with fine ridges, not generally
represented by any trace of septa within the corallites, and rise somewhat at the edges of the
calices' giving an appearance almost of furrowed walls. The septa number about 25—30 in
the fully formed calices, approximately equal in size, no cycles distinguishable, often one or
two groups of three fusing together, 20—24 joiming in to the columella which is formed of
fine trabeculae from their edges, closely packed together (spongy) in a mass about 1°5 mm,
in diameter. The septa are narrow above and fall almost perpendicularly at the edges of
the calices; they are thin and not granulated laterally, and their teeth are relatively low
and blunt but increase in size towards the centre, the ring of teeth on the separate septa
of the shallower calices simulating a crown of pali. Jn section the endothecal dissepiments
are a little melined, about ‘8 mm. apart. The walls of the separate corallites are to a con-
siderable extent welded together, but are more rapidly than other parts penetrated by boring
organisms, so that they may appear relatively cavernous.

The colony was attached to the overhanging edge of a lagoon shoal by a narrow, dead
base, on which part were growing Lithothamnion, Halimeda, red Polytrema, a colonial

—EE———

MADREPORARIA. 779

The species has a much rougher appearance than C. savignyi, from which it differs
markedly in its septa. With Solenastraea forskaelana Ed. and H. the specimens agree in
all respects except in the different sizes of their septal cycles, but this is a variable character.

Locality. Hulule, (1) W. reef, and (2) passage through same.

44. Cyphastraea savignyi (Ed. and H.).
Ed. and H., 11 p. 485. Klz., p. 51, and Gard. p. 761.

Four specimens, all more or less rounded and completely covered by living polyps, of the
identity of which with the above no doubt can be entertained. One specimen, a ball, completely
corresponds to Klunzinger’s description, differing somewhat from his figure, to which a second
rather irregular specimen, evidently grown under bad conditions, completely answers. The
other specimens have slightly larger corallites, in exsertness intermediate to my Rotuma
specimen, but more crowded together. The costae are always very prominent and not rough.
The exotheca has tiny, somewhat scattered spinules, but in the second specimen referred to
appears from surface view to be vesicular. Twelve rather smooth septa typically fuse in the
columella, and are equal sized. The theca of the calices is often very delicate, giving their
edges a thin appearance.

Locality. Goidu, all from hollows of the reef-flat and boulder zone.

45. Cyphastraea hemprichana (Ed. and H.), Ed. and H., 1. p. 495.

A single specimen, almost completely surrounded by the corallites, a free edge showing
in one place covered by a dense epitheca. Calices on the upper surface crowded, about 1°5 mm.
in diameter, half this breadth distant from one another underneath, edges always distinct,
appearing more prominent owing to the slightly exsert upper ends of the septa. Exotheca
with a few, almost smooth spinules above, lower and scarcely visible below, not clearly
connected with the costae, which are quite distinct at the edges of the corallites. Septa
relatively smooth and very little toothed, edges almost perpendicular, 6 clear systems and
3 cycles quite distinct from one another, primaries meeting in the centre of the calice so
deep down as scarcely to be visible from the surface, shallower calices underneath.

Locality. Hulule, from the reef-flat of the south end.

46. Cyphastraea microphthalma (Esper). Ed. and H., 1. p. 485.

I refer to this species three specimens, which agree with the descriptions in all essential
characteristics. The corallites may be crowded or separated by half their diameter from one
another on the outgrowing edges, slightly (‘5 mm.) or not at all projecting, but always
distinct owing to the arched, slightly exsert, upper ends of the septa. Costae sunk in the
exotheca, edged with numerous, very rough, low spinules, giving a granular appearance. Septa
similarly very rough, as described by Ed. and H. Paliform teeth present or absent. Colwmella
always distinct, ending in papillae, or of a trabecular appearance. Hwotheca very dense, in
places almost solid, with here and there relatively large cavities.

Locality. (1) Turadu, S. Mahlosmadulu, W. reef, near breaker-zone, a rather smooth
incrusting mass, much studded with Pyrgoma up to the pores of which the corallum extends ;
(2) S. Male, 25 f; (3) Suvadiva, 31 f, and (4) Addu, 40 f on the outer slope, both the latter
rough with trabecular columella and very indistinct paliform lobes.

Gai 100

780 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

47, Cyphastraea suvadivae, n, sp.

Colony flat, incrusting, but probably showing all the regular shapes found in other species
of the genus, covered with round, scarcely projecting corallites. The latter 1—1°5 mm. broad,
from 1:5—3 mm. distant from one another, jomed by a vesicular exotheca covered with small,
low, blunt spinules, which near the calices may be arranged in lines leading to the low spines,
which represent the costal plates. Theca scarcely raised above the exotheca around the edge
of the calice, the ring-form being mainly due to the slightly exsert, upper edges of the septa.
Latter numbering 24, those of cycle III. very thin but generally distinct, projecting half-way
to the columella; those of cycles I. and II. nearly equal, with rough, spiny sides, giving them
a coarse appearance, edges bluntly notched, the inner teeth not distinguishable from the two
or three rough rods of the columella. Calices quite shallow, with a closed im appearance below.
The exotheca is formed by minute cell-like vesicles. In some sections it almost simulates the
appearance found in Galaxea, but is clearly dependent on the costae. The endothecal
dissepiments are very thin, close together and almost horizontal.

The species approaches nearest to C. microphthalma, but differs in its more distant
calicles and much hghter and more open method of growth.

Locality. Six small pieces from Suvadiva, 20 f They are somewhat distorted on the
surface with barnacles and worm tubes, and the structure underneath more or less destroyed
to within 4 mm. of the surface by boring animals.

48. Cyphastraea maldivensis, n, sp.

Colony consisting of thin, incrusting masses, but probably showing all the shapes found
in the genus. Corallites round, practically not projecting, not more than 15 mm. broad,
generally separated by at least two or three times their diameter from one another, joined
by a glabrous looking exotheca, obviously even from the surface formed by very small, flattened
vesicles, often with their walls incomplete on the surface, but where complete studded with
low rounded granules. Costae practically non-existent, but tops of the septa a little projecting
over the upper ends of the calices, giving an appearance of rings slightly raised round their
edges. Septa 24, tertiaries distinct at edge of calice, projecting about one quarter way to
columella, ending perpendicularly inside with small, pointed teeth; primaries and secondaries
nearly equal, rather thin, slightly exsert, a few spines on the sides, ending inside with long,
thick, pointed, spiny teeth, extending almost at right angles over the axial fossa, the inner
parts of the septa by their fusion presenting sometimes a fenestrated appearance. Colwmella
formed by open trabeculae from the septal edges, a quarter to a third the width of the calice,
sometimes with points above but never papillary. The calices, owing to the small breadth
of the tertiary septa, the thin septa and large columella, appear relatively open.

The exotheca is more abundant and vesicular than it is in the last species, and still
more closely resembles Galaxea; the piling up of the vesicles on the surface between the
corallites is very distinct. The species more closely resembles the last than any other, but
differs in its surface appearance, thinner septa with long pointed teeth and _ trabecular
columella.

Locality. S. Nilandu, 25 ff, and Felidu, 20 to 25 f.

MADREPORARITA.

781

Characters

Echinopora rosularia (Lmk.)

Echinopora solidior (Ed. & H.)

Echinopora tertia, 0. sp.

1. Size of Calices.
2. Depth of Calices.
3. Edges of Calices.

4, Costae.

5. Number of Septa.
6. Character of Septa.

7. Columella.

8. Section a. Exotheca.

b. Endotheca.

ec. Septa.

9. Growth characters
and epitheca.

10. Locality.

11. Colour.

3x 4mm. or round.
1mm.

Little cones, 1—3 mm. high.
Septal spines thin, 1 mm.
high.

Very close set, fine lines,
made up of fine, low
(‘5 mm.), rounded spi-
nules.

16—24

I and II cycles subequal,
rough and thick at edge
of calice with 3 blunt,
rough teeth, 2 on exsert
upper edges, the 3rd and
innermost, only present
on about half, quite pali-
form; III very minute
and thin.

About } breadth of calice,
spongy, dense, very fine
trabeculae from about 10
septa.

Scarcely visible, very dense.
Not clear, horizontal (?).

Fenestrated ; especially line
outside pali lobes which
are hence true pali.

14 specimens, largest a foli-
ated cup 13x18x9cm.
deep, ‘cm. thick, most
merely folia, one incrust-
ing 35 em. thick. Epi-
theca 2°5cem. from edge
which is evenly costu-
lated, smooth or minute
spines.

Common, W. Reef, Hulule,
foliated masses 2 feet or
more across, and a small
piece from Felidu, 14 f.

Green.

6x5 mm. or round.
2mm.

Flat. Thick spines from
about 15 septa, 2 mm.
high, subequal.

Edge of colony lines of
flattened rough spinules,
1mm. high; central part
irregular.

24-—30

About 18, larger, rough,
thick at edge of calice,
no distinct teeth, rather
more than half with a
small thick — paliform
tooth. Betweenlastabout
10 very minute septa.

Similar to last, but much
less dense and from about
18 septa.

Dense, vesicular.

Horizontal, 5 mm. apart,
thin.

As last.

A single folium 7 x 10 cms,
by 18 mm. thick in centre.
Epitheca to 5mm. of edge,
otherwise same as last.

Passage into Hulule.

Brown.

5—7 mm. x same.
1:5 mm.

Flat. Septa not more than
1mm. exsert, thin.

At edge lines centre irregu-
lar; vary from round,
smooth to characters of
last, always thinner,
‘75 mm. high.

36—48

Typically I and II larger
and subequal, rough, up-
permost tooth over theca
longest, lowest where pre-
sent very fine and sub-
paliform, III similar but
thinner; [V minute, com-
monly bend round and
fuse with III at middle
of their breadth.

Similar to last, rather hol-
lowed in centre from
about 14 septa.

Very dense, vesicular.

Irregular, little vesicular,
dense.

Perforated at edges ;
true pali.

no

Two thick masses, largest
10 x 14cm. by 4em. thick,
incrusting thin at edges.
Epitheca, etc. same as
last.

Edge of S.W. Reef, Hulule.

Green- brown.

Comparison and Characters of Echinopora

rosularia, solidior and tertia (see p. 782).

100—2

782 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

XVI. Genus “chinopora.

Dana, p. 278. Ed. and H., um. p. 621. Kiz, p. 54.

A genus closely allied to Trachypora (syn. Echinophyllia), which has been generally
confused with it. No specimens come from Minikoi. E. rosularia is alone abundant, but it
is very local and scarcely a reef-builder.

49. Echinopora rosularia (Lmk.). (RI. LXIII. fig. 37.) Ed. and H., 11. p. 623.
50. Echinopora solidior (Ed. and H.). (Pl. LXIIIL. fig. 38.) | Ed. and H., 11. p. 626.
51. Echinopora tertia, n. sp. (Pl. LXIII. fig. 39.)

The three above-mentioned species are evidently so closely allied that it seems most
useful to represent their characters in tabular form (p. 781). They are from the same locality
and also environment, but I cannot see that they show any signs of merging into one another.
One is naturally inclined to suspect a relationship to Klunzinger’s 3 species from the Red Sea
E. ehrenbergi, concamerata and carduus, but, if the characters of these forms be tabulated
and compared with the above, the whole six would appear to be different.

Doubtless all the three forms grow into the same shape under favourable conditions,
incrusting base rising into flat or rounded folia, on one side covered with polyps, but
occasionally folia fusing so that both sides may appear to be so. The calices on the folia
often have their lower edges higher, where also the costae are more marked and longer spined
than on the incrusting base; otherwise variation is very slight and mostly vegetative. Increase
takes place as in other Echinopora.

52. Echinopora magna, n. sp. (PI. LX. fig. 10.)

Colony foliate, epitheca thin, underside covered with rounded, radiating ridges, 8 in 1 cm.
Calices round, 7—9 mm. in diameter, lower sides much raised on folia so that the whole
opens upwards. Costae large and very thick alternating with much smaller and finer; the
larger with a few broad, blunt, low spines, at the lower edge of the calices much thicker
and with two or three blunt spines or lobes, 2—3 mm. long. Septa very thick, especially
at lower edges of calices, thin inside, about 12 subequal with often near their lower ends
two or three pointed teeth alternating with very small ones, corresponding to the smaller
series of costae. Columella about + breadth of calice, rising little below level of theca,
appearing finely paliform, really somewhat spongy and formed of trabeculae from half of
the septa. In section exo- and endothecal dissepiments more or less horizontal, thick or thin,
somewhat vesicular, 1—2 mm. apart.

The specimen is merely part of the foliated edge of a much larger colony. It appears
to be a true Echinopora, approaching the so-called E. aspera which is, according to Klunzinger,
a Trachypora (Fungidae).

Locality. S. Nilandu, 30 7

XVII. Genus Galawea.

The genus is mainly interesting from the fact that of the fourteen specimens obtained
nine were dredged from various depths down to 36 f, outer slope and lagoon. Among Maldivan
reef forms the genus is rare.

MADREPORARIA, 783

53. Galaxea fascicularis (Linn.).
G. fascicularis et irregularis Ed. and H., 11. pp. 227 and 229; Klz., p. 78.

I refer eight specimens to this species from which I am unable to separate G. irregularis,
since they all show variations intermediate to the previously given characters of the two
species. The variation is well dealt with by Klunzinger for G. irregularis. One specimen
in places recalls G. musicalis, but elsewhere clearly belongs to facies irregularis.

Locality. Reef-flat, Addu and Turadu, S. Mahlosmadulu; west reef, Hulule; velu, Hulule,
6 f.; N. Male, 18 f and 21 7; Suvadiva, 20 f

54. Galaxea musicalis (Linn.). Ed. and H., 1. p. 225.

I cannot define any specific characters beyond those given by Ed. and H. The larger
septa are 1—1°5 mm. exsert, all are represented by costae, and all three cycles are generally
clearly visible; those of cycle I. are larger than IL, but both I. and II. fuse by trabeculae
in the axial fossa.

Locality. N. Male, 25 7; S. Male, 26 7, and Addu, outer slope, 25 /.

55. Galaxea hexagonalis, Ed. and H. Kd. and H., 1. p. 226.

A very much more delicate coral than G. fascicularis with septa 2—3 mm. exsert, much
more marked costae and a well-developed columella, formed of coarse trabeculae, quite distinct
even in the smallest corallites, besides all the other characters given by Ed. and H. The
perithecal vesicles are thinner walled and appear rather larger than in G. fascicularis.

Locality. Inner part of reef-flat of Minikoi and N. Male, 25 f, a few corallites. Colour,
transparent, hence appearing white, with peristome dark olive.

56. Galaxea lamarcki, Ed. and H. Ed. and H., u. p. 225.

Milne-Edwards published excellent figures of this species (Le Regne Animal de Cuvier,
Atlas, pl. 85, figs. 1, la—b) from which my specimen differs in having the corallites averaging
2—2°5 mm. in diameter, the primary septa 5—1 mm. exsert, in most calices 6 septa as in
fig. 1 fusing to form the columella, though certain rather larger and more upstanding calices
exactly resemble fig. 1 a, perithecal cells quite distinct on the surface, continuous throughout
and not in bands. The separate vesicles are larger than in any of the other species in the
collection, and the corallum is extremely light. Its under surface is covered by a distinct
epitheca.

Locality. S. Nilandu, 36 7.

57. Galaxea, sp.?

A fragment with 20 corallites with perithecal vesicles very similar to the last but smaller,
corallites slightly larger and rising for less than 1 mm. above the peritheca, septa scarcely
exsert, fusion of primaries only in the axial fossa, septal cycle III. scarcely represented, corallites
6—9 mm. distant.

Locality. Felidu, 25 f

784 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

XVIII. Genus Stephanocoenia.

58. Stephanocoenia maldivensis, n. sp. (Pl. LXII. figs. 29 and 30.)

Colony at first incrusting, then massive, covered up to the edge with a distinct epitheca.
Calices, polygonal, often somewhat elongated or distorted, 4—6 mm. in diameter, 2—4 mm. deep.
Walls, ‘5—2 mm. thick, pointed or not, covered by the exsert (1—1 mm.) rather angular or
slightly flattened ends of the septa, which may be continuous between the calices or alter-
nating. Septa, two series, 6—12 larger, subequal, scarcely toothed save for a crown of low,
rather pointed perpendicularly rising teeth against the axial fossa, and 6—12 very minute,
more or less alternating with the larger. Columella, a single fine, possibly somewhat bent
rod, occasionally branched once or twice, joined here and there by trabeculae to the septa.
In section walls solid or with a line of small vesicules in the centre; endothecal dissepiments
‘5 mm. apart, thin, rather irregular, almost horizontal, occasionally joimed forming vesicles;
columella continuous from base; septa fenestrated, especially in a line behind their thickened
edges, which probably represent true pali. Increase by marginal budding.

Locality and variation. (1) The greater part of a colony 14x8 cm. by 6 cm. thick
from outer edge to the fissure zone of Minikoi reef; colour, living, olive-brown; a heavy rounded
colony, walls 1—1:5 mm. thick, calices 4—4°5 mm. deep, 45 mm. in diameter, budding vigorous.
(2) Five pieces, all from Hulule, the largest an edge of an incrusting mass 12x9x3 cm.
from the S.-W. reef; light, often very thin walls, rather irregular on surfaces, calices smaller
in hollows, generally about 4 mm. in diameter, rather shallow locuh, septa often only 6—9
of the paliform series. (3) Four fragments from fissure zone of W. reef of Maradu, Addu;
heavy, rather approaching (1) but calices 5—5°5 mm. in diameter, not more than 3 mm. deep
and columella tending to become compound. (4) A small colony from the passage into
Hulule; large, elongated (5°5 mm.) calices, top endothecal dissepiments rising to within 1 mm.
of edges of septa and obliterating the columella.

XIX. Genus Acanthastraea.

59. Acanthastraea hirsuta, Ed. and H. Ed. and H., 11 p. 502, D. 5, 4
Var. microstoma, Klz. (Pl. LIX. fig. 6.) Kalzanp sy 42 aie:
Var. megalostoma, Klz. Klz., p. 42, V. 1.

In section my specimens have solid thick walls, 2—3 mm. thick, and dissepiments thin,
rather oblique, tending to be vesicular, 15—2 mm. apart. I can see no true columella, but
the section shows a mass of relatively large, blunt, obliquely upstanding teeth from about
a third of the septa, filling up the axial space. My specimens in every part so distinctly
belong to one or other of the two forms as to suggest that Klunzinger is here dealing with
true varieties and not merely facies.

Locality. Minikoi, reef-flat (var. microstoma) and Hulule passage (var. megalostoma),
rare, only two specimens.

MADREPORARIA. 785

XX. Genus Prionastraea.

The genus is in its definition a most unsatisfactory one. It shows many resemblances
to Goniastraea, from which, owing to budding sometimes taking place close to the columella,
individual specimens can only be separated with difficulty. It assumes, indeed, the same
position in respect to it as Orbicella does to Astraea.

The species in the collection shows very distinct variation, which is mentioned under each.
In all characters it seems to be very largely correlated with environment, i.e. vegetative. The
edges, the upper sides and lower parts perhaps of the several species, differ somewhat from
one another in the sizes, depth, thickness of walls, spinulation, ete. of the calices. Yet the
colonies of P. crassior and P. fusco-viridis clearly show that there are limits to this variation,
and that it follows along distinct limes for the several species. The two types of calices
described in P. robusta and P. magnistellata are also in this respect remarkable. The
number of the septa is fairly variable for each species, but the number which run into the
columella is about the same im all (18—24) owing to physical causes. The septa preserve
their type in each species, though this shows considerable variation in P. fusco-viridis,
apparently in this case largely connected with the several localities from which the specimens
were obtained.

Distribution. A common reef-builder, great masses on the outer slope to 15 f, small
colonies on the reef-flat even under the breakers, very common on lagoon shoals, often forming
overhanging masses; vertical to 30 fathoms. Colour, generally brown to green. The colonies
tend to be much bored into by worms and other destructive organisms at the base, but
the surface is usually entire.

60. Prionastraea pentagona Klz. Kiz., p. 39, tv. 7, and x. 5.

A small specimen, 8 x 6 cm., from the breaker zone of the reef at Minikoi, closely
resembles Klunzinger’s description and figures of this species. The calices are rather smaller,
averaging about 65 x 5 mm., largest 8°5 x 5 mm.

61. Prionastraea spinosa Klz. Kilz., p. 39.
A small specimen from 8. Nilandu, 30 7, with a dozen corallites answering in every

respect to the above species save that it would appear to be in its structure rather more
delicate. The septal sides are a little rough and spiny.

62. Prionastraea robusta (Dana). (PI. LXIV. fig. 42.) Dana, p. 248, xur. 10.

A specimen similar to P. crassior in shape, with similar rough-sided septa with blunt,
spiny teeth (a little higher and more regular than Dana’s fig. 106), with nearly solid walls,
endothecal dissepiments about ‘5 mm. apart (in longitudinal section 3 cells in 2 mm.), not
very oblique. The columella is one-fourth to one-fifth the diameter of the calice, almost
flat-topped, dense, very finely trabeculate, spongy, and the innermost teeth of the septa,
especially in the deeper calices, simulate a paliform crown.

The specimen is part of a mass, one side and much of the top of which had been
killed apparently by sediment, while the other side was growing out vigorously underneath,
with a longitudinally striped, almost costate, lower surface, with no distinct epitheca such
as is generally found in the genus. Budding takes place near the centre of the calice so
as almost to simulate fission, a character considerably enhanced by the rapid formation of

786 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

the dividing walls. All the calices are polygonal with thin edges but may be divided into
two classes, (a) those on the top scarcely showing any budding, 10—14 mm. in diameter,
walls thin edged but 1—3 mm. thick at level of columella, septa about 34, alternately larger
and smaller, more than two-thirds reaching the columella, each with 6—10 low, subequal,
blunt, rough teeth, the innermost commonly larger and forming a little crown rising
15—2 mm. above the top of the columella, and (b) those to the sides, vigorously budding,
6—9 mm. in diameter, crowded, more irregular, less polygonal, walls thin, at level of columella
not more than 1 mm., same depth or even up to 5 mm. (hence appearing very markedly
different), septa about the same number alternately larger and smaller, less than two-thirds
reaching the columella, with 2—7 (commonly 3 or 4) much higher, irregular, very blunt and
spiny teeth, those round the pali narrower but not more marked than the rest, though rising
to the same height above the columella.

This extraordinary variation of the calices represents types as distinct as P. abdita and
profundicella, or P. sulfurea and quoyi (see Ed. and H.), and throws a considerable light
on the variability of the genus. It distinctly suggests that mere size has nothing to do
with the number of septa in adult calices.

Locality. Hulule, reef-flat to south-west.

63. Prionastraea crassior (Ed. and H.). (Pl. LXIV. figs. 45, 46.) Ed. and H., 1.
p. 515.

I refer a specimen about 38 cm. long by 20cm. high and the same in thickness, and
probably having more than 2000 corallites, to this species, with the description of which it
corresponds in every particular.

The colony is a very large, heavy mass, rough and uneven (hilly) on the surface but
not in any way gibbous. It is covered with calices, the older of which average between
10 and 11 mm. in diameter, with younger ones of 5—7 mm. between. On the upper part
the calices are more or less polygonal, relatively deep (5—6 mm.), thin walled (seldom less
than 1 mm. except where a new calice has formed), but on the sides are more rounded or
oval, shallower, and much thicker walled (2—3 mm.). The septa are continuous over the
walls (1 mm. exsert), always slightly thickened, but quite markedly so towards the base of
the mass, where, on the top of the walls, they alternate with fine ridges, not generally
represented by any trace of septa within the corallites, and rise somewhat at the edges of the
calices giving an appearance almost of furrowed walls. The septa number about 25—30 in
the fully formed calices, approximately equal in size, no cycles distinguishable, often one or
two groups of three fusing together, 20—24 joining in to the columella which is formed of
fine trabeculae from their edges, closely packed together (spongy) in a mass about 15 mm.
in diameter. The septa are narrow above and fall almost perpendicularly at the edges of
the calices; they are thin and not granulated laterally, and their teeth are relatively low
and blunt but increase in size towards the centre, the ring of teeth on the separate septa
of the shallower calices simulating a crown of pali. In section the endothecal dissepiments
are a little inclined, about ‘8 mm. apart. The walls of the separate corallites are to a con-
siderable extent welded together, but are more rapidly than other parts penetrated by boring
organisms, so that they may appear relatively cavernous.

The colony was attached to the overhanging edge of a lagoon shoal by a narrow, dead
base, on which part were growing Lithothamnion, Halimeda, red Polytrema, a colonial

MADREPORARIA. 787

Tunicate, Polyzoa, sponges, as well as a Madrepora, a Montipora and two Paracyathus.
The coral itself is much bored into by worm tubes and apparently Achyla. Its edges are
explanate, covered below by a dense wavy epitheca, the colony evidently attempting to grow
out at the base in competition with the various organisms there settled.

Locality. Minikoi. The brownish-green colonies are fairly common on the lagoon shoals,
though I only brought home a single specimen, not at the time recognising its specific identity
from other species.

64. Prionastraea fusco-viridis (Q. and G.). (Pl. LXIV. figs. 43, 44.)

Quoy and Gaimard, Voy. de U'Astrol. iv. Pl. XVII. fig. 8. Dana, p. 229, Pl. XI. fig. 7.
Gard., p. 759, Pl. XLVII. fig. 5.

I refer twenty-nine specimens, more than half of which are of relatively large size, to
this species. In shape the masses vary from convex, with low elevations due to the surface
on which they are seated, to flat or convex with upstanding, almost perpendicularly rising
hillocks, sometimes flat with a corallite on the top, but more often ending in a thick ridge,
all with ecalices on the sides.

The calices are generally polygonal in shape, about 11 mm. in diameter, but where about
to bud may be narrow, up to about 20 mm. long, and in the valleys very small, 8 mm. or
less in diameter; in depth they vary greatly, typically perhaps about 8 mm., shallower on
the walls and near the edges. Their walls in the valleys of the colony are generally sharp
pointed or ridged above, thicker below, 1 mm. or less, rising over the general surface to
about 2 mm., and at the edges, or on elevations, or ridges to 3—4 mm. The septa are
generally continuous between the calices, their exsert portions similar in every respect, not
rising more than *5 mm. over the walls, arched, giving the thicker an appearance of rounded
off ridges. They vary in the average sized calices from 35—55 in number, but in the more
elongate rise to 75 or more. No systems are distinguishable, the smaller occasionally fuse
with the larger, and about 18 or 20 run into a spongy columella of 2—2°5 mm. in
diameter, generally formed of very small, densely packed trabeculae from the septal edges.
The sides of the septa may be almost smooth or spiny. The septal teeth are always bluntly
pointed and low near the walls, generally 8—11 im number; they may be subequal, very
little longer at the inner ends of the septa, or may become relatively long (2 mm.) and
more pointed. The innermost may rise perpendicularly for 2—2°5 mm. above the columella,
simulating a crown of pali but more commonly such is absent, the septal edges appearing
almost to merge into the columella.

The edge of the colony, wherever visible, is covered with a thick, transversely wrinkled
epitheca. The walls are exceedingly dense, in section often quite solid, sometimes with a line
of cells in their centres. The endothecal dissepiments are thin, oblique (45° to the walls)
‘5—1'5 mm. apart. Increase is by intercalicinal budding near the edges of the calices, but
fission not infrequently occurs, especially in the valleys.

Locality. Very common on lagoon shoals and outer slope, often forming immense masses,
both at Minikoi and in the Maldives, and one piece from N. Mahlosmadulu, 24 7, Colour,
transparent or brown to dark green over the walls, brown-green peristome, edge of stomodoeum

brilliant green.
G. I. 101

788 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

The specimens vary considerably in their septal sides and teeth and the nature of their
columella, ze. (1) an incrusting mass without hillocks, septa smooth sides, low teeth, and
columella typical; (2) numerous low hillocks, septa rough sides, teeth low, columella rising
into points; (3) almost flat, few hillocks, septa nearly smooth sides, long teeth may simulate
a pali crown, columella with points; (4) almost same as (1) with a few hillocks, septa tending
to be alternately larger and smaller; (5) Goidu, very hillocky and ridged, septal sides smooth
or low spinules, medium teeth, septa merging into a dense or slightly spiny columella;
(6) Hulule, rounded or hummocky, septal sides smooth or very low spines, teeth longer than
in (5), columella dense or almost appearing as if formed by the inner septal teeth; (7) rounded,
septa thin sides, smooth, teeth long, distinct crown round columella; (8) rounded, sides of
septa smooth, teeth very long and numerous, merging below into the papillated columella.

The species may be identical with P. obtusata Ed. and H., over which it has priority.
It is considerably denser, heavier and shallower than P. abdita Ed. and H., which scarcely
can be the same species described by Ell. and Sol. Of Klunzinger’s species it differs from
P. tesserifera in the character of its walls and septa, from P. vasta in the same and
paliform crown, from P. spinosa in its very spiny septa and their number, while the size
of the calices at once separates P. pentagona. P. gibbosa Klz. resembles it greatly, and
indeed may well be a dwarf form with fewer septa.

65. Prionastraea magnistellata (Ed. and H.). (Pl. LXIV. figs 40, 41.) Ed. and H.,
u. p. 516.

Two specimens agree with the above-cited species in form of growth, size, shape and
depth of calices, number and characters of septa, though there are two distinct sets, and
in the distances between the endothecal dissepiments. The columella is not “bien développée,
dun tissu assez dense,” but of rather coarse trabeculae, a character which in P. fusco-viridis
may be seen to vary very considerably, and the calices are often relatively thick walled, and
elongated or irregular in shape, largely owing to budding taking place near the inner ends
of the septa.

The larger calices in my specimens range up to 23mm. in length by 13 in breadth,
but the average are about 17 by 14 mm.; in depth they vary up to 14 mm., averaging
11—12 mm., only edge or young ones less than 10 mm. The septa vary in number, in the
largest calices 60—70, average sized ones 40—50, and occasionally fuse with one another;
the systems are irregular and not distinguishable, 16—24 larger meeting in the central part
of the calice. The dividing walls vary from 1—2°5 mm. in thickness; over them the septa
are slightly thickened, about 1 mm. exsert, flat, finely toothed edges, over the thickened walls
tending to have distinct notches or to be broken in the centre, almost giving the appearance
of a furrow. The septal sides are slightly granulated, and their edges, falling at first almost
perpendicularly into the calices, end in pointed teeth, which near the centre, where they are
very crowded, increase in length up to 3mm. The columella typically consists of a mass
of rather coarse, twisted trabeculae from the septal edges 2—3 mm. across.

The specimens, two in number, differ considerably, though certain calices in each are
not distinguishable. The Minikoi one is a convex mass 13 x 11 cm. with generally thick
walls (2 mm.), septa about 55 in number, exsert portions of same notched, calices relatively
larger and distinct columella, while the Hulule one is the edge of a mass killed in the
centre, with quite thin walls over which the septa (about 42 in number) are very distinctly

MADREPORARIA. 789

thickened, calices narrower and hence appearing deeper, septal teeth not so markedly in-
creasing in size towards the axial fossa, sometimes meeting over, sometimes merging into the
smaller and less distinct columella.

Locality. Minikoi and Hulule, E. and W. reefs.

66. Prionastraea suvadivae, n. sp.
A rounded head, 9 cm. across x 6 cm. high, stalk covered by organisms, the greater part
dead but calices quite distinct and 18 still alive when obtained.

Corallites varying up to 28 mm. long but the actual cavities much less, the calices not,
indeed, averaging more than 15 mm. broad, 8—10 mm. deep. Dividing walls appearing from
the surface a little hollowed out and exceedingly thick, 2—10 mm., but the greater thickness
is made up of endothecal vesicles and very oblique dissepiments, reaching to within ‘5 mm.
of the granulated tops of the septa which are continuous between the calices. Septa numbering
30—40, smooth sided, set with 8—12 blunt, low, subequal teeth which on about 18 of the
larger, merge into the trabeculae of the rather small, coarse columella. Hndothecal dissepiments
about 1 mm. apart, exceedingly oblique. Only one bud showing and that from about half
way down the septa.

It is obvious that the circumstances controlling the growth of this specimen were
eminently unfavourable—it was probably growing on the edge of a lagoon shoal and fell off
into deeper water, the muddy bottom of which was slowly killing it—its very thick walls
being a character associated generally with the edges or less vigorously growing parts of
colonies. Yet it exhibits this last character to a degree more extreme than described in
any other species. Its nearest ally is, in my opinion, P. favosa, but it is a distinet species.
I give it a geographical name, as I am uncertain as to which of its characters are really
of specific importance, although certain suggest other and more appropriate names.

Locality. Suvadiva, 25 f.

Genus Merulina.

67. Merulina ampliata Ell. and Sol. (Pl. LXIV. figs. 47, 48.)

Ell. and Sol., Zooph. p. 157, Pl. XLI. figs. 1 and 2; Esper, Pflanz. t. 1. p. 96, Pl. LXXVIL ;
Dana, p. 272, xv. 2; Ed. and H., m1. p. 628.

A single large specimen and several small pieces, all from the W. Reef of Hulule, which
agree in every respect with the above descriptions. Off the outer slope at Goidu this or a
similar species is very abundant forming foliaceous colonies two or three yards across and high,

68. Merulina prolifera Quelch.

Quelch, Challenger Report on Reef Corals, p. 110, Pl. II. fig. 1.

Three small specimens from Suvadiva 35 f, S. Nilandu 36 f, and N. Male 24 J, appear
to belong to this species, the type of which I have examined.

101—2

790 J. STANLEY GARDINER.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
(All the photographs show the natural sizes of the different coralla.)

PLATE LIX. Fic. 27. Favia hombroni.

Fics. 1—3. Symphyllia sinuosa. Fig. 28. Goniastraea solida.
Fics. 4, 5. Antillia constricta. Fics. 29, 30. Stephanocoenia maldivensis.

Fic. 6. Acanthastraea hirsuta.
PLATE LXIII.

PLATE LX.
Fic. 31. Aphrastraea deformis.
HnGEY tes Coron ri ae Fie. 32. Orbicella annuligera.
Jie, Sh ae rs cooperi. Fic. 33. 4 eee
Fic. 10. Echinopora tees Fic. 34. a Me estes
Fie. 11. Hydnophora eae Fic. 35. : raoneonen eae
Fie. 12. 0 maldivensis. Te. 36 i erat
PLATE LXL Fic. 37. Echinopora rosularia.
Fic. 38. 5 solidior.
Fic. 13. Favia cavernosa. Fic. 39. L Cactin :
Fies. 14—18. Favia denticulata.
Fies. 19—21. » hululensis.
PLATE LXIV,
PLATE LXII. Fies. 40, 41. Prionastraea magnistellata.
Fie. 22. Favia affinis (Minikoi). Fic. 42. Prionastraea robusta.
Fie. 23. PA 5 (Hulule). Figs. 43, 44. 3 fuscoviridis.
Fie. 24. » laccadivica. Fies. 45, 46. 0 crassior.
Fig. 25. » parvimurata. Fic. 47. Merulina ampliata.
Fie. 26. » adduensis. Fig. 48. ” (from beneath).

[I hope in a subsequent Part to publish figures of the two new species of Cyphastraea,
the previously known species of which scarcely require further illustration. J. s. G.]

Fauna and Geography, Maldives and Laccadives Plate LIX

STANLEY GARDINER——ASTRAEIDAE (I)

Fauna and Geography, Maldives and Laccadives Plate LX

Sy

bate 3 z
Ue ene ‘a
i Rr:
. iis TaN
te ais >
‘\:
aii s

» P . “ SS
YL, sn Sb ae
SAMS LIA LEVEN ~ 9-

S56 RS
PAS

<e,

( Se

hl <ci/

Mints. 2c

eth, yeas
SBS

TAS...

gs. we

ij
ae
AVA

STANLEY GARDINER——ASTRAEIDAE (Il).

Fauna and Geography, Maldives and Laccadives Plate LXI

i Se
%, See) Nd ny
2 v
A oe AS
2.

ew

Tay ME WS

nN oS x
WM a a ws
ay Ie ar’ h Ape
Whe a
uae | r

STANLEY GARDINER——ASTRAEIDAE (Ill).

Fauna and Geography, Maldives and Laccadives

Plate LXIl

I
aN =

a oe

46
ge

WPT Yr ee yo
new hie

x

“ as
he ce AS

ia

eS.) eae “a
Ree gy ee ? vl we aee
by hy <i BAG

STANLEY GARDINER——ASTRAEIDAE (IV).

4
*
SL
é

= Lene be

Fauna and Geography, Maldives and Laccadives Plate LXIIt

STANLEY GARDINER—— ASTRAEIDAE (V)

SF en lie ab

v=

nel ee

(ee

Fauna and Geography, Maldives and Laccadives Plate LXIV

sie

Sime Nie

Shins

~

Wy
Fi

4
NY

y) SS
we DS

GZ Wy .

STANLEY GARDINER——ASTRAEIDAE (VI).

ANTIPATHARIA.
By C. Forstrer-Coorrr, M.A., Trinity College, Cambridge.
(With Plate LXV.)

THE collection of Antipatharia obtained in the Maldive islands consists of eleven species
all belonging to the subfamily Dekamerota (Schultze!) and to the subtribes Indivisae and
Ramosae (Brook?).

As in many other groups of the Coelenterata, in the Antipatharia it is very difficult
to decide what characters constitute a “species.” In the main divisions there are characters
of indisputable value sufficient to clearly mark off the subfamilies Dodekamerota, Dekamerota,
and Hexamerota*, But, on considering the forms within some of these groups, we find not
only a considerable amount of variation in the characters but also annectent forms between
specimens, which might otherwise be regarded as distinct species. We are here only con-
cerned with one subfamily, the Dekamerota, and with four of its suborders, Cirripathes,
Stichopathes, Antipathes and Aphanipathes, within which all the specimens in the Maldivan
collection are comprised.

The anatomy of the forms in these four groups yields us very few, if any, characters
of assistance. The major anatomy is precisely similar for all of them, that is to say they
have the ten mesenteries in the upper division of the coelenteron, the invariable six tentacles,
and the gonads are formed in the usual way on the larger mesenteries. Further in the minute
anatomy of those species which I have been able to study, this similarity is the same even

! Schultze, F. E., ‘* Beit. zur System der Antipatharia.” Order INpIVISAE.
Ergebnisse einer zool. Forschungsreise von Kiikenthal in Colony free, in the form of a simple unbranched
Abhandl. der Senckenberg. Naturf. Gesellsch., Bd xxi. 1896. stem.
2 Brook, G., Challenger Reports, Vol. xxxu. Cirvipathes,
* The following is Schultze’s classification which is used Stichopathes.
here. Order Ramosar.
Antipathidae (Verrill em Br.). Colony free, branched.
1. Subfamily DopreKamerora (Sch.). Antipathes,
12 mesenteries arise in the upper coelenteric space. ap Laney cele?
Tepoathen( Ga Parantipathes.
pathes (Gray em Br.).
Tribe II. Peristome in the form of two short involu-
2. Subfamily Dexamerora (Sch.). tions penetrating into the coelenterie space.
10 mesenteries arise in the upper coelenteric space. Schizopathes,
Bathypathes,

Tribe I. Involutions of peristome wanting. Sos
Taxipathes.

Order Crustosar.
Colonies cover foreign bodies with a crust, only
the end branches being free. 6 mesenteries arise in the upper coelenteric space.
Savagliopsis. Cladopathes.

3. Subfamily Hexamerora.

792 Cc. FORSTER-COOPER.

down to the distribution of the nematocysts on the tentacles, but unfortunately the preser-
vation of many of the specimens, especially those with smaller polyps, was too bad for minute
examination. The damage was probably done right at the beginning, the polyps owing to
their extreme delicacy being quickly spoilt in the short time between their capture by the
trawl and their preservation. 4

We have left then a certain number of characters on which to found our species, all
of which are of a type in which we may expect, and usually find, great variation. They
may be briefly summarised as follows:

1. Method of growth.

2. Colour.

3. Size of polyps, and their distribution on the corallum.

4. Shape of polyp and its tentacles.

5. Size, shape, and distribution of spines. and presence, or absence, of secondary spines.

Taken separately these characters are not of much use, for instance the growth of a
colony may be easily altered by outside influences, such as currents, temperature or locality.
Schultze quotes the case of Savaglia (Gerardia), which in its normal condition grows as a
slender, well branched bush, a metre or more in height. In regions, however, where coral
fishing is carried on, the fishing nets continually dragged over the bottom break down these
tall colonies, and as a result forms of stunted growth with thick bases, sending out a large
number of short branches, are found. If such a cause as this can alter the form of growth
of a colony it is extremely probable that the many natural physical differences of environ-
ment, which obtain in different localities, must act in the same way and produce different
forms of growth. The same author also points out that from this very reason forms, which
have the same type of growth, must not of necessity be closely allied, since it may be the
result of convergence due to these causes.

Of the value of colour we are in this group more or less ignorant, the only specimens
obtained with a distinctive colouration being Antipathes rubra and Cirripathes anguina.

The shape of the polyp in the groups under consideration shewed too great similarity
to enable any conclusion to be arrived at; all were either round or oval or both on the
same corallum, but the younger polyps were frequently found to be more oval than the more
fully grown ones. The height of the polyp is also so much a matter of relative contraction
that too much stress must not be laid upon it. There is, however, a certain difference in
absolute size between different forms, by which several groups may be roughly arranged.

There is left, then, the spines—their shape and arrangement—and here there seems to
be a character of more promise. However, they will only serve to differentiate between
species, there being no type of spine entirely confined to one group so as to mark off that
group from all others. Also two forms differing in method of growth, size of polyp and
other particulars, may yet have very similar spines. so that it is only by combining all
these characteristics that we can form a working classification. Whether it will ultimately
prove a natural one is doubtful.

All the figures are magnified 8 diameters unless otherwise specified. I have to thank
Mr Crossland for three specimens from E. Africa,

ANTIPATHARIA. 793

ANTIPATHIDAE.,

Subfamily Dekamerota Schultze.

Polyps in which ten mesenteries arise in the upper coelenteric space.

Order INDIVISAE Brook.

Colony free, in the form of a single unbranched stem.

Genus Cirripathes Blainy. em Brook.

An elongate unbranched corallum around which the polyps are distributed subspirally in
several irregular rows, never in a single linear series.

1. Ctrripathes diversa Brook. Pl. LXY. figs. 1, la.

A small colony attached to a piece of nullipore, about 25 cm. long, subequally curled.
Diameter of corallum 3 mm, at the base, tapering only very slightly to the top.

The spines are of two kinds, the primary stout, long and blunt at the end, slightly
roughened and arranged in longitudinal rows, from eight to twelve rows being seen in the
total circumference. The secondary spines are small and triangular, disposed quite irregularly
among the larger ones.

Locality. Miladumadulu atoll, 24 f Also recorded from Galle, Ceylon (Brook), Wasin
island, E. Africa (coll. Crossland).

2. Cirripathes anguina (Dana). Pl. LXY. fig. 2.

A long sinuous unbranched stem, 40 cm. long (incomplete at basal end), greatest diameter
7 mm. tapering to the point. Corallum jet black.

Polyps dark rose pink, thus differmg in colour from Dana’s species in which they were
green. There are six rather long tentacles. The size of the polyps varies from 2 mm. in oral
diameter in the larger specimens down to small young ones 1 mm. across. The distribution
of the polyps on the corallum is also irregular being generally one sixth of an inch apart;
towards the top, however, they are more crowded together.

The spines are conical and equal in size, fairly stout and with a tendency to be arranged
in spirals. They are, however, somewhat irregular in the lower part of the corallum. There
are no secondary spines.

Locality. S. Nilandu, 307 Also from the Red Sea, Seychelles, and Ceylon.

3. Cirripathes gardinert n. sp. Pl. LXV. figs. 3, 3 a.

An incomplete stem 30 cm. long, sinuous with rough annular joints at rare intervals.
Greatest diameter 3mm. Corallum jet black.

Polyps straw yellow (in spirit). The latter are large, averaging 3 mm. high and 2 mm.
in oral diameter. There is, however, variation in this respect, some being larger and some
(younger intercalated polyps) being much smaller. Their distribution is all round the corallum
but quite irregular as to position, The anatomy was found to be quite normal. There are
six equally inserted tentacles, the two lateral ones being a little the longer.

794 C. FORSTER-COOPER.

The spines are irregularly placed, and bluntly conical with here and there a tendency
to be knobbed at the end. A few exceedingly small triangular secondary spines are scattered
irregularly among the larger ones.

This form is not unlike C. anguina in general appearance. The polyps are a good deal
larger and the spines of slightly different shape; the colour is also different, a point however
of very doubtful specific value. The presence of secondary spines, which are not found in
C. anguina, is sufficient to distinguish the two forms.

Locality. Suvadiva atoll, 40 f.

Genus Stichopathes Brook.
An elongate unbranched stem with the polyps arranged on one side of the stem only.
4. Stichopathes maldivensis n. sp. Pl. LXV. fig. 4.

A single straight corallum 85 cm. long, tapering from 4mm. at the base. Corallum jet
black. The polyps were unfortunately in very bad condition. Enough could be made out,
however, to shew that they were arranged on one side of the stem only, white in colour
and with six long digitiform arms.

The spines were of two kinds, the primary ones stout, bluntly conical with rough sides
and knobbed at the end. They are arranged in irregular spirals. The secondary spines are
exceedingly small triangles scattered quite irregularly.

Locality. Haddumati atoll, 37.

Order RAMosAE Brook.
Colony free and branched.

Genus Antipathes (Pall. em Schultze—Antipathella Brook).
5. Antipathes spinosa (Carter). Pl. LXV. fig. 5.
A small colony 7 cm. high, main stem erect giving off secondary branches at intervals
of 2—3 mm. apart, which again bear very slender alternate pinnules.
The polyps are exceedingly small, arranged on one side of the pinnule only, white in colour.

The spines are rather long, sharp and hooked upwards, with a distinct spiral arrangement,
which is somewhat obscured in places.

Locality. Hulule, 25 7:
6. <Antipathes chota n. sp. Pl LXV. figs. 6, 6a, b.

The colony is erect and consists of a very thin black main stem, which almost imme-
diately gives off other branches at different angles. These latter frequently are further
branched. The colonies are small, the largest measurmg only 8 cm. in total height.

The polyps are white, of variable size but all exceedingly minute, the average size being
not more than ‘75mm. They are arranged on one side of the stem only. They are rather

regularly placed at intervals of 1mm. from one another. The tentacles are for the size of
the polyp rather long.

ANTIPATHARIA. 795

The spines are also very minute and few in number, being conical or triangular, rather
blunt and regularly arranged in spirals. About eight spines go to form a complete spiral.

Locality. This form seems to be the commonest in the Maldive islands, several specimens
being obtained from different atolls. South Nilandu, 24 7, North Male, 20 f,, 25 f, and 30/f,
Mulaku, 30 f,, Felidu, 35 f, Suvadiva, 387 7.

7. Antipathes regularis n. sp. Pl. LXV. figs. 7, 7a.

A branch evidently torn off a larger colony. The main stem of the branch, 2 mm. in
its widest diameter, is 15 cm. long. Six subsidiary branches varying from 15 to 20 cm. long
are given off at irregular intervals, and these again give off long pinnules. The specimen
on the whole is very sparsely branched. The corallum is black, turning to light brown in
the smaller arms.

The polyps are white, placed very regularly on one side of the stem, and close together.
All the full grown polyps are equal in size, but occasionally there are some young ones
situated between the others.

The spines are stout, sharp, conical and hooked upwards. The arrangement is roughly
eight to ten rows in straight lines. There are no secondary spines.

Locality. Fadifolu, 22 7.

8. Antipathes rubra n. sp. Pl. LXV. figs. 8, 8 a—d.
A few simple straight pinnules 10 cm. long, probably torn off a colony. The corallum
and polyps are both a dark claret red.

The polyps are minute, 1 mm. in diameter, arranged on one side of the stem at regular
intervals of 1 mm. The tentacles are comparatively long and digitiform.

This form obtained from several stations shews a good deal of variability especially in
the arrangement of the spines. Unfortunately only small parts of the colony were brought
up by the dredge on each occasion, so that the method of growth of the species remains
in doubt. It appears, however, that branches are given off at an angle of 25 degrees from
the stem.

The spines are of one type only but vary in size from minute conical forms pointing
straight out from the stem to fairly stout sharp spines hooked and directed upwards. They
are usually arranged in spirals of some regularity, but vary largely in the number of spines
going to form a single spiral, and this even in the same specimen. Figures 8 a and 6 are
from different specimens, while ¢ and d are from different parts of a third form,

Locality. Suvadiva, 43 f., 42 f. and 31 f, Felidu, 35 f, North Male, 28/7.

9. Antipathes nilanduensis n. sp.? Pl. LXV. figs. 9, 9 a, b.

Part of the corallum only, 5 em. long, giving off sinuous branches from 4 to 7 cm. long,
some of which again give off secondary branches, roughly at right angles.

Polyps of irregular size, the largest being 2 mm. across, grey in colour and with short
tentacles. They are placed on one side of the corallum only.

Spines minute, conical, arranged in eight roughly straight lines, in parts with a tendency
towards a spiral arrangement.

Locality. Felidu atoll, 36 f. and South Nilandu, 34 £ The South Nilandu form had
rather larger polyps and the spines arranged in a more markedly spiral fashion.

G. IL 102

796 CG. FORSTER-COOPER.

10. Antipathes pumila Brook.

A single colony 25 cm. high, of the “bottle brush” type of growth. The specimen agrees
with Brook’s description in all particulars except that it is of greater size. There seems to
be very little difference of any importance between this form and A. abies.

Locality. Kolumadulu atoll, 337; also from Kurrachee (Brook).

Genus Aphanipathes Brook.

Corallum shrub-like with the branches free, or fan-like and reticulate. Spines elongate,
equal or longer in the polyp areas. Polyps small and inconspicuous.

The difference between the two genera Antipathes and Aphanipathes appears to me to
be founded on very slight grounds. The main point distinguishing them les in the fact
that in the latter the spines are longer in the polyp areas and penetrate into the polyps
themselves. In view of the fact that in some forms of Antipathes the spines are irregular in
size and often very variable in different parts of the corallum, it seems that too much stress
must not be laid on this point of difference.

The other characters used by Brook to define the genus are also equally useless. “Polyps
small and inconspicuous,” “more or less oval outline,’ “tentacles usually very short,” can all
be applied to different species of the suborders Antipathes and Antipathella, the latter of
which has already been merged into the former by Schultze. Probably further knowledge
of the group at present under consideration will lead to the same fate.

11. Aphanipathes plantagenista n. sp. Pl. LXV. figs. 10, 10a.

Colony of the “broom” type of growth. Two equal sized main stems 20 cm. in height
giving off branches on one side of the corallum only; these again sending off irregular branches.

Polyps very small *5 to 1 mm, in diameter, very regularly placed on one side only of the
corallum at equal distances of *5 mm.

Spines stout, sharp and triangular with a general tendency to be larger in the polyp
areas and on the polyp side of the corallum. They are arranged in spirals and are not
very numerous, about eight going to form one spiral.

This form is not unlike the description of A. sarothamnoides (Brook) but differs essen-
tially in having smooth spines.

Locality. South Nilandu, 36 7, and Felidu, 35.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXV.

Fie. 1. Cirripathes diversa, colony x =. a. Magnified to shew spines x 8.

Fie. 2. Cirripathes anguina, stem ~ 8.

Fia. 3. Cirripathes gardineri, part of corallum with polyps x. a. Stem x 8.
Fie. 4. Stichopathes maldivensis, stem x 8.

Fic. 5. Antipathes spinosa, stem x 8.

Fic. 6. Antipathes chota, colony x4. a. Stem x 8. 6. Two polyps x 8.

Fic. 7. Antipathes regularis, stem with polyps x 8. a. Stem x 8.

Fia. 8. Antipathes rubra, two polyps near end of a branch x 8. a—d. Stems x 8.
Fic. 9. Antipathes nilanduensis, colony x +. a. Two polyps x 8. 6. Stem x 8.

Fic. 10. Aphanipathes plantagenista, colony x 2. a. Stem x 8.

Fauna and Geography, Maldives and Laccadives Plate LXV

FORSTER COOPER——ANTIPATHARIA.

~Sae

.
a;

fee

ia

W

: en ? Tpit 4 »

6.
ae
ie

ARACHNIDA.

By R. I. Pocock, F.Z.8., Superintendent of the Zoological Society's Gardens,
Regent's Park; late Assistant in the Zoological Department of the
Natural History Museum, S. Kensington.

(With Plate LXVI.)

INTRODUCTION.

From the proximity of the Maldives and Laccadives to the coasts of Southern India
and Ceylon, coupled with the well-known distributional powers of Spiders, it might have
been foretold that the Arachnid fauna of these islands would prove to be essentially similar
to that of the western portions of the Oriental Region. This has been demonstrated to the
full by the collection brought back by Mr Stanley Gardiner. Some of the species, such
as Isometrus europaeus, Heteropoda regia and Uloborus geniculatus which frequent human
dwellings, have doubtless been introduced by human agency; but it is probable that the
ancestors of the majority of the Spiders reached these islands on floating gossamer threads,
the characteristic mode of travelling of the newly hatched young of most species, of the
order Araneae. The presence of only one species of Scorpion, and that a form notoriously
liable to dispersal by man’s instrumentality, suggests that, unless in very remote times, there
has been no connection between the Archipelagoes and the mainland of India of a nature
suited for the migration of purely terrestrial species from the latter to the former; and
this is further borne out by the almost complete specific identity between the faunas. A few
species only have been described as new; but in each case there are no strong grounds
for supposing the forms to be peculiar, except perhaps the representative of the genus Desis.
The discovery of this genus is one of the most interesting features of Mr Gardiner’s work,
so far as Spiders are concerned; for, as stated below, it fills an important and hitherto
regrettable gap in our knowledge of the range of this curious marine Spider.

In addition to the material collected by Mr Gardiner, I have been able to examine
a small collection from the Suvadiva atoll in the Maldives, which was kindly sent to me
by Mr G. P. Staunton, who, undaunted by the trials and hardships incidental to an enforced
residence in this atoll as the result of shipwreck, bottled some specimens of spiders and
forwarded them to me upon his arrival at a civilised port.

In conclusion, I may add that Mr Gardiner has kindly allowed me to figure certain
of the more important structural features, which have never been previously illustrated, of
some of the commoner species—a concession which I trust will add something to the value
of this paper.

102—2

798 R. I. POCOCK.

Order SCORPIONES.
Family Buthidae.
Genus Jsometrus, Hempr. and Ehrenb.

1. Lsometrus europaeus, Linn.

Scorpio europaeus, Linn. Syst. Nat. ed. 10, p. 625, 1758 (= maculatus De Geer and most
recent authors).

Locality. Minikoi; Fainu, N. Mahlosmadulu; Hulule, Male; and Havaru Tinadu, Suvadiva.
Introduced by human agency from the Oriental Region all over the tropical and subtropical
parts of Asia, Africa, and America.

Order PSEUDOSCORPIONES.
Family Cheliferidae.
Genus Garypus.

2. Garypus maldivensis sp. n. (Pl. LXVI. fig. 1 a—e).

Colour a tolerably uniform testaceous yellow; the carapace from the anterior border as
far back as the anterior of the two transverse depressions reddish-brown, the posterior
portion marked like the first tergal plate, with a broad median greyish-black stripe, and
a patch of the same colour on each side; the succeeding tergal plates marked with four
spots, one, frequently broken up, on each side of the middle line and one near the lateral
angle: ventral surface uniformly pale except for the presence of a spot on the side of the
five posterior sterna; chelicerae brownish; chelae with hands and fingers deep reddish-brown,
the latter sometimes bluish at base, the remaining segments pale; legs uniformly pale.

Integument of dorsal and ventral sides covered with fine coriaceous sculpturing which
under a } inch objective is resolved into a pattern of minute polygonal areas; the fingers of
the chelae finely but decidedly granular, and sharply marked off from the hands in that
particular; hairs short, simple, delicate and sparsely distributed, longer and coarser on the
extremities of the legs than elsewhere.

Carapace much longer than wide, its posterior width scarcely greater than the length
from the posterior border to the anterior edges of the anterior eye; ante-ocular portion
narrowed and depressed, with rounded frontal lobes and a deep but wide median depression ;
post-ocular area marked with two transverse depressions, the anterior of the two mesially
obsolete, distinct laterally; the posterior, defining the posterior fifth of the carapace, distinct
and of almost uniform depth from side to side.

Chelae long: trochanter with a broad stalk, evenly rounded in front; femur slender, not
stalked, gradually incrassate; tibia shorter than femur by nearly one-fourth the length of
the latter, also slender and incrassate, the posterior border lightly. convex, the anterior nearly
straight; hand with a definite, short, cylindrical stalk, the expanded portion oval, the inner
border more strongly convex than the outer, a little shorter than the tibia; fingers long
and curved, the movable digit surpassing the length of the underhand by nearly one-third

of its own length.

e

ARACHNIDA. ; 799

Chelicerae with basal segments armed with four long setae (as in fig. 10): a single
seta at apex of movable digit; immovable digit arcuate, with hyaline dorsal crest; flagellum
of movable digit long, slender with a variable number of longer or shorter digitiform terminal
processes.

Measurement in mm. Total length, 55 with 2°5, length of chela, 7-5.

Locality. Midu, Addu Atoll.

Judging from its geographical distribution this species will probably prove to be nearly
related to G. personatus Simon (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1901, p. 79) from the Malay Peninsula.
The latter, however, was based upon a much smaller example, measuring in fact only 3°5 mm.
in length. Moreover the name personatus has already been applied by Simon to a quite
distinct form from the Sandwich Islands and cannot therefore be used for the Malay species.
(Arach., Faun. Hawaven. 1. pt. v. p. 518, 1900.)

Order ARANEAE.
Family Barychelidae.

Genus Sason Simon.
3. Sason cinctipes Pocock.

(Ecophleus cinctipes Pocock, Ann. Mag. Nut. Hist. (6), 1x. p. 49, JG san Nites 1h Ise yAs
Sason cinctipes, id. Arachnida of British India, p. 173.

Locality. Hulule, Male.

The genus Sason ranges from the Seychelles to Celebes. S. cinctipes has been recorded
from Ceylon and doubtfully from Southern India.

Family Scytodidae.

Genus Scytodes Latr.
4, Scytodes gilva Thor.

Dictis gilva Thor., Ann. Mus. Genova, Xxv. p. 83, 1887.
Locality. Inguradu, N. Mahlosmadulu.
Widely distributed in the Oriental Region.
The specimens collected in the Maldives have been compared with Burmese examples
determined as S. gilva by Thorell.
Family Uloboridae.

Genus Uloborus Latr.
5. Uloborus geniculatus Oliv.

Locality. Minikoi; and Midu, Addu.
A widely distributed Oriental species.

Family Arygopidae.
Genus Tetragnatha Latr.
6. Tetragnatha foveata Karsch (Pl. LXVI. fig. 2 a—c).
Tetragnatha foveata Karsch, Berl. Ent. Zeits. XXXvi. p. 289, 1892.

800 R. I. POCOCK.

Locality. Minikoi; Miladumadulu Atoll; Limbo-Kandu, N. Mahlosmadulu; Goidu, Goifur-
fehendu; and Suvadiva Atoll.

The specimens I refer to this species agree closely with the description given by Karsch
of 7. foveata, which was based upon an example from Ceylon.

For future verification, figures of the mandibles of the male (2a) and female (2 5) and of
the palpus of the male (2c) are subjoined.

Genus Leucauge White.
Leucauge White (= Arygroepeira Emerton, Tr. Conn. Acad. Vi. p. 331, 1885).

7. Leucauge ventralis (Thor.) (Pl. LXVI. tig. 3 a—c).

Meta ventralis Thorell, Ann. Mus. Genova, X. p. 423, 1877; Pocock, Arachnida of British
India, p. 216.

Locality. Minikoi; Ereadu and Maungudu, Miladumadulu; Limbo-Kandu, Inguradu, Fainu
and Kenurus, N. Mahlosmadulu; and Hulule, Male.

This species is very abundant in the Maldive Archipelago. It was originally recorded
from Celebes and subsequently from Burma, where it is common, by Thorell.

The Maldive specimens have been compared and found specifically identical with examples
from Burma determined by Thorell. Since this species has never been figured, I subjoin
three figures showing the essential characters of the male and female (fig. 3).

8. Leucauge celebesiana (Walck.).

Tetragnatha celebesiana Walck., Ins. Apt. U. p. 222, 1837; Arygroepeira celebesiana, of
Thorell and other authors.

Locality. Maungudu, Miladumadulu.

This well-known species ranges from India and Ceylon eastwards, at least as far as

Celebes. It is far less common in the Maldives than JL. ventralis.

Genus Cyclosa Menge.
9. Cyclosa insulana (Costa).
Locality. Maungudu, Miladumadulu; Limbo-Kandu and Inguradu, N. Mahlosmadulu;
Kumfinadu, S. Mahlosmadulu; and Hulule, Male.

This species has a wide distribution in the tropics.
Genus Aranea Linn.
10. Aranea punctigera (Dol.).
Epeira punctigera Doleschall, Verh. Nat. Vereen Nederland Indié, ut. p. 420, 1857.
Locality. Minikoi.
This species has a wide range in the Oriental Region.
ll. Aranea theis Walck.
Epeira theis, Walck., Ins. Apt. u. p. 53, 1837.
Locality. Hulule, Male.

As generally recognised A. theis has a wide tropical distribution in the eastern hemisphere.

ARACHNIDA. 801

12. Aranea cicatrosa Stol.
Meta cicatrosa Stolicka, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, Xxxvill. p. 242, t. Xx. fig. 5, 1869.
Araneus cicatrosus Pocock, Arachnida of British India, p. 226, 1900.

Locality. Maungudu and Manadu, Miladumadulu; Limbo-Kandu, Bodu Faro, Inguradu
and Kenurus, N. Mahlosmadulu; Kumfinadu, Madu, Kanifuri, Maduwari and Turadu,
S. Mahlosmadulu; Goidu, Goifurfehendu; Hulule, Male; Suvadiva; and Midu, Addu.

Common in India, Burma and Indo- and Austro-Malaysia.

Genus Argyope Aud.

13. Argyope anasuja Thor.

Argiope anaswja Thorell, Ann. Mus. Genov. xxv. p. 162, 1887; Pocock, Arachnida of
British India, p. 222, 1900.

Locality. Very common throughout the Maldive Archipelago, specimens being taken
from fifteen different islands; from Ereadu in Miladumadulu to Midu, Addu Atoll.

This species has been recorded from several localities in Southern India, but has not
yet been taken in Ceylon. Although abundant in the Maldive Archipelago, it was not
found by Mr Gardiner in Minikoi.

Genus Gasteracantha, Sund.

14. Gasteracantha brevispina (Dol.).
Plectana brevispina, Doleschall, Nat. Tijdschr. Nederland Indié, xin. p. 423, 1857.
Gasteracantha brevispina Thorell and recent authors.

Locality. Minikoi; and in the Maldive group of wide distribution, but not obtained in
Suvadiva or Addu nor indeed south of Hulule, Male.

Common in Ceylon, India, Burma and eastwards thence into Austro-Malaysia.

Genus Poltys C. Koch.

15. Poltys illepidus Koch,
Poliys illepidus C. Koch, Die Arachn. x. p. 97, fig. 21, 1843; Pocock, Arachnida of British
India, p. 236.

Locality. Mainikoi; Inguradu, N. Mahlosmadulu; Kumfinadu, S. Mahlosmadulu; Hulule,
Male; and Suvadiva. Previously recorded from Ceylon and Indo- and Austro-Malaysia.

Family Hersiliidae.

Genus Hersilia Aud.
16. Hersilia savignyi Lucas.
Hersilia savignyt Lucas, Mag. Zool. 6°™’ Année, cl. vil. p. 10, t. xu. fig. 1, 1836.

Locality. Minikoi. Common in India and Ceylon.

802 Ree LOCOCK:

Family Agelenidae.
Genus Desis Walck.
17. Desis gardineri sp. n. (Pl. LXVI. fig. 4 a—e).

Colour. Mandibles and cephalic region of carapace mah®gany-brown; rest of carapace,
legs, palpi and sternum, ochre-yellow ; abdomen testaceous.

Eyes of anterior line straight by their centres; medians smaller than laterals, less than
a diameter apart, distance between median and lateral greater than diameter of the former,
about equal to transverse diameter of the latter; eyes of posterior line subequal and sub-
equally spaced, the medians a little farther from each other (about two diameters) than
from the laterals; the inner edge of the anterior median situated in the same longitudinal
line as the centre of the space between the posterior median and lateral.

Mandibles normal in form, dentition as in D. crosslandi, the posterior tooth of the
outer row small, separated from the anterior by a space which is equal to about three or
four times its own height.

Palpi and legs of first and second pairs unspined; 3rd leg: tibia armed with 1 dorsal,
1 anterior, 1 posterior and 2 inferior distal spines, its protarsus with 11—12 spines, its
tarsus with 6 inferior spines; 4th leg: tibia armed with 2 posterior and 2 inferior apical
spines; protarsus with about 14 spines; tarsus with 6.

Epigyne very like that of D. crosslandi, but the orifices of the receptacula seminis less
circular, more oval, the paired processes farther from their anterior rims, and with. their apices
closer together; the terminal linguiform process slightly clavate, much less curved than in
D. crosslandi, lying indeed nearly in the same plane as the median area of the epigyne. Total
length, 8 mm.; length of carapace, 3 mm.

Locality. Minikoi. A single female example was obtained from the reef at low tide,
midway between Minikoi and Wiringili Islands.

It is possible that this species may prove to be identical with D. crosslandi, but for
the present there is not enough material of either form to settle absolutely the constancy
of the differential characters pointed out between the two.

The discovery of the genus Desis in the Laccadives fills an important gap in our
knowledge of the distribution of the genus. Up to the present time it was only known
from the Indo-Australian Seas, from New Zealand up to Singapore, and on the coast of
South and East Africa from Grahamstown and Natal to Zanzibar. As I have already pointed
out (P. Z. S. 1902, p. 391), the Zanzibar form, D. crosslandi, in spite of its geographical
isolation, conforms to the type of species prevalent in the Australian Seas and not to that
which is characteristic of South Africa. And Mr Gardiner’s discovery of a species of the
genus half-way between Singapore and Zanzibar is strong confirmation of the suggestion
already put forward that representatives of Desis will be found in suitable spots all along
the coast of Southern Asia.

Family Oxyopidae.
Genus Oxyopes Latr.
18. Oxyopes hindostanicus Pocock.
Oxyopes hindostanicus Pocock, Journ. Bombay Nat. Hist. Soc. x1. p. 482, 1901.

ARACHNIDA. 803

Locality. Minikoi; Inguradu, N. Mahlosmadulu; Mahrus and Turadu, S. Mahlosmadulu ;
and Goidu, Goifurfehendu. Common in India and Ceylon.

Family Thomisidae.
Genus Thomisus Latr.

19. Thomisus pugilis Stolicka (Pl. LXVI. fig. 5).

Thomisus pugilis Stolicka, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, XXXvitl. p. 246, 1869.

Locality. Inguradu, N. Mahlosmadulu; Madu, Hedufuri and Turadu, S. Mahlosmadulu ;
and Goidu, Goifurfehendu. Widely distributed throughout India.

The pearl-like granulation of the face is very characteristic of this species.

Family Clubionidae.
Genus Olios C. Koch.

20. Olios lamarcki (Latr.).
Thomisus lamarckw Latreille, Gen. Crust. et Ins. 1. p. 118, 1806.

Locality. Minikoi; Fainu, N. Mahlosmadulu; Turadu, §. Mahlosmadulu; Hulule, Male;
and Midu, Addu. Previously known from Madagascar, Ceylon and Southern India.

Genus Heteropoda Latr.

21. Heteropoda regia (Fabr.) (= H. venatoria of most recent authors).

Locality. Minikoi; and Inguradu, N. Mahlosmadulu. This species has been artificially
distributed throughout the tropics by the agency of shipping.

22. Heteropoda atollicola sp. n. (Pl. LXVI. fig. 6 a—c).

$. Colowr. Carapace yellowish-brown, marked with blackish patches, the latter clothed
with blackish hair; a posterior transverse pale stripe and a large pale central spot on
clypeus; mandibles black, scantily clothed with pale hairs above; legs and palpi yellowish-
brown, spotted and banded with blackish-grey patches above; dorsal side of abdomen mouse-
brown, mottled with blackish patches above; ventral surface testaceous; sternum and coxae
ochraceous. Carapace a little longer than wide, its dorsal surface horizontal, as long as tibia
of 2nd leg, and as femur of 38rd or Ist. Posterior median eyes less than a diameter apart,
more than a diameter from the posterior laterals, eyes of anterior line nearly straight by
their upper edges, the laterals standing only a little higher, diameter of medians a little
exceeding radius of laterals, the latter rather less than their diameter above the edge of
the clypeus. Legs 2, 4, 1, 3, the 2nd rather less than four times the length of the carapace,
measured from the base of the femur. Vulva with the two lobes meeting posteriorly in
the middle line and circumscribing a longitudinally elliptical area bearing a narrow median
longitudinal crest (fig. 6 c).

Jf. Like the $ in colour except that the mandibles are yellow. Smaller and with
considerably longer legs. Carapace a little shorter than tibia of 3rd leg. Palpus with tibial

G. IL 103

804 R. I. POCOCK.

apophysis (fig. 6 6) slender, slightly sinuous, directed forwards, slightly outwards, and _ slightly
curved over at the point; beneath it at the base there is a short but strong angular
process. For structure of palpal organ see fig. 6 a.

Measurement in mm. §. Total length 15, length of carapace 6:5, of Ist leg 24, of
2nd 27, of 3rd 23, of 4th 24. ¢. Total length 10, length of carapace 5, of Ist leg 25, of
2nd 30, of 3rd 22, of 4th 24.

Locality. Minikoi; Madu, S. Mahlosmadulu; Hulule, Male; and Suvadiva Atoll.

It seems improbable that this species will prove to be peculiar to the Maldive and
Laccadive Archipelagoes, but I cannot refer the specimens to any Oriental species known to
me. Three Ceylonese species, however, which I have not seen, have been described by
Karsch (Berl. Ent. Zeits. XXXVI. pp. 291—292, 1892), namely H. umbrato, eluta, and subtilis ;
but the details given of the tibial apophysis in each case seem to preclude the probability
of H. atollicola being identical with either of them. It is to be hoped that the publication
of the figures of the vulva and of the palpal organ will enable the question to be definitely
settled when Karsch’s types have been re-examined.

Family Attidae.
Genus Thotmes F. Cambr. (= Plexippus auct. in part).

23. Thotmes puykulli Aud. (Pl. LXVI. fig. 7).
Attus puykulli Aud. and recent authors.
Locality. Minikoi. A widely distributed species.

I take the opportunity of illustrating the structure of the vulva (fig. 7), which has never
before been figured, I believe.

Genus Carrhotus Thor.

24. Carrhotus viduus C. L. Koch; Thor. (Pl. LXVI. fig. 8 a, b).
Carrhotus viduus Thor., The Spiders of Burma, p. 378, 1895.

Locality. Minikoi. This species has been previously recorded from Ceylon, Burma, and
elsewhere in the Oriental Region.

Fig. 8a shows the tarsus of the palp of the male from the underside and 80) the
tibial apophysis of the same appendage, structures which have not been hitherto figured.

Genus Hyllus C. Koch.
25. Hyllus pudicus Thor. (Pl. LXVI. fig. 9 a—c).
Hyllus pudicus Thorell, The Spiders of Burma, p. 373, 1895.
Locality. Minikoi. <A species hitherto recorded from Burma.

Some important specific characters of this species are shown by fig. 9 a—e.

Fauna and Geography, Maldives and Laccadives Plate LXVI

POCOCK——ARACHNIDA,

Fic.

Fic.

Fia

Fia.

Fic.

Fic.

Fie.

Fie.

Fia.

ARACHNIDA. 805

EXPLANATION OF PLATE LXVI.

1. Garypus maldivensis; a. carapace and anterior two terga, 6b. right chelicera from above,
c. and d. flagella of two specimens, e. right chela from above.

2. Tetragnatha foveata; a. right mandible of male from below, 6. right mandible of female
from below, c. palpus of male,

. 3, Leucauge ventralis; a. lateral view of cephalothorax with palpus of male, b. lateral view
of female to show form of abdomen, c. vulva of female.

4. Desis gardineri; a. vulva from below, 6. vulva from the side, c¢. lateral view of vulva
of D. crosslandi Poc., d. distal end of left mandible from below, e. dorsal view of ocular area.

5. Thomisus pugilis; anterior aspect of the face to show ocular arrangement, granulation
and distribution of black pigment.

6. Heteropoda atollicola; a. palpal organ from beneath with a larger illustration of the distal
portion of the embolus and its sheath, 6. the tibial apophysis, c. vulva.

7. Thotmes puykulli 2; vulva.

8. Carrhotus viduus; a. tarsus of palp of male from beneath, 6. portion of tibia of same
appendage with apophysis.

9. Hyllus pudicus; a. underside of tarsus of palp of male, 6. tibial apophysis of the same
appendage, c. vulva of female.

“ Woo
a 7 _

oF

iby A? RA pegs 7 a
a wo

i : po
ea eee 7 ai

= ’ - o » ie 7 fe
Z _ Pl iit. ar i t se
BL
Ly Pie va ;
OL) |) hie ee
Ww Wr 5. D.

ao tO 9

_
= ==

s)
»
a